2009 Cadillac CTS/CTS-V Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold
in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors
of Canada Limited” for Cadillac Motor Car Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
Index
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the
index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
www.helminc.com
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do not do this,”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
. : Fuel Gage
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
+ : Fuses
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
F : Traction Control
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front seats have adjustable head restraints
in the outboard seating positions.
The vehicle’s rear seats have head restraints in the
outboard seating positions, but they are not adjustable.
{ CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head.
This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a
crash.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint up
to raise it. To lower the
head restraint, press the
button, located on the top
of the seatback, and push
the restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The vehicle’s head restraints are not designed to be
removed.
Active Head Restraint System
On vehicles with an active head restraint system in the
front outboard seating positions, the head restraints
automatically tilt forward to reduce the risk of neck injury
if the vehicle is hit from behind.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
1. Lift the bar to unlock
Front Seats
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Leg Extension
Power Seats
On vehicles with power seats, the controls are located
on the outboard side of the seats.
On vehicles with this feature, adjust the manual leg
extension by reaching under it, in the pocketed area.
Press the release button and pull or push to lengthen
or shorten it. Release the button to lock it in place.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the horizontal control up or down.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the horizontal control up or down.
Power Lumbar and Side Bolsters
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
horizontal control up or down.
The vertical control is used for reclining the seatback.
See “Power Reclining Seatbacks” under Reclining
Power Lumbar
The vehicle may have
this feature. The driver
and passenger seatback
lumbar support can be
adjusted by moving the
control located on the
outboard side of the
seat cushions.
A. Seat Cushion Bolster Adjustment Switch
B. Lumbar Support Control Switch
C. Seatback Bolster Adjustment Switch
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Adjust the seat as needed.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Heated and Ventilated Seats
On vehicles with this feature:
On vehicles with this feature, the buttons are located on
the climate control panel.
• Press and hold the top of the control (B) to increase
support to the top of the seatback and decrease
support to the bottom of the lumbar.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to heat the
seat and seatback.
• Press and hold the bottom of the control to
decrease support to the top of the seatback and
increase support to the bottom of the seatback.
{ (Ventilated Seat): Press to ventilate the seat.
A light bar in the climate control display shows the
setting; high, medium, or low.
• Press and hold the front or rear of the control to
increase or decrease support to the entire seatback.
Press either button to start that feature at the highest
setting. Each press of the button, decreases the setting.
Side Bolster
To turn the feature off, press the button until the light
turns off.
On vehicles with this feature:
• Press the top or bottom of control (A) to increase or
decrease support in seat cushion bolsters.
The heated or ventilated seats shut off when the vehicle
is turned off.
• Press the top or bottom of the control (C) to
increase or decrease support in the seatback
bolsters.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recall memory positions, the vehicle must be in
P (Park) for an automatic transmission or the parking
brake applied for a manual transmission. Press and
release either button 1 or button 2. A single beep will
sound. The seat, outside mirrors, and steering wheel will
move to the position previously stored for the identified
driver.
Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
Wheel
On vehicles with the memory package the controls
are located on the driver door. This feature is used to
program and recall memory settings for the driver seat,
outside mirror, and the steering wheel position if the
vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering
feature.
If the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is used to
enter the vehicle and the remote recall memory feature is
on, automatic seat and mirror movement occur.
1: Saves the seating position for driver 1.
2: Saves the seating position for driver 2.
On vehicles with the Keyless Access System, automatic
adjustment occurs when the driver door is opened.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power tilt wheel control, or power mirror
buttons.
S : Recalls the easy exit position.
To save your positions in memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback recliner and
lumbar, both outside mirrors, and the steering
wheel to a comfortable position.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound
through the driver side front speaker to let you
know that the position has been stored.
3. Repeat the procedure for a second driver using
button 2.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If something has blocked the driver seat or the steering
column while recalling a memory position, the recall may
stop. Remove the obstruction, then press the appropriate
control for the area that is not recalling for two seconds.
Try recalling the memory position again by pressing the
appropriate memory button. If the memory position is
still not recalling, see your dealer/retailer for service.
On vehicles with the Keyless Access System, automatic
adjustment occurs when the ignition is turned to OFF
and the driver door is opened.
A single beep sounds. The driver seat moves back, and
if the vehicle has the power tilt wheel and telescopic
steering feature, it moves up and forward.
See “EASY EXIT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle
Easy Exit Recall
For more programming information, see DIC Vehicle
S : With the vehicle in P (Park) for an automatic
transmission or the parking brake applied for a manual
transmission, press the exit button to recall the exit
position.
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the DIC, automatic
seat and power telescopic steering column movement
occurs when the key is removed from the ignition.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
If the front passenger seat has a manual reclining
seatback, the lever used to operate it is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To recline the seatback:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
1. Lift the recline lever.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, use the
vertical power seat control located on the outboard side
of each seat.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
• To recline the seatback, press the control toward
the rear of the vehicle.
• To raise the seatback, press the control toward the
front of the vehicle.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle is
moving.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion,
have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the
seat and wear your safety belt properly.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
To return the seatback to the upright position:
Split Folding Rear Seat
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle may have a split folding rear seat.
To lower one or both of the rear seatbacks:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1. Pull forward on the tab,
located on the outboard
side of the seatback,
to unlock the seatback.
1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.
2. Make sure the seatback is locked into place
by pushing and pulling on it.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.
When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in
the upright, locked position.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
2. Fold the seatback down. This allows access to
the trunk.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is
in a seat and using a safety belt properly.
This section of the manual describes how to use
safety belts properly. It also describes some things
not to do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
This vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle the
for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without safety belts, they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good driver
does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the
everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop
or crash.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones.
You could also severely injure internal organs like
your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the
belt across you more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for use and important safety information.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should return to its stowed position.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out
of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the safety belt and the vehicle.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger seating positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for
front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal crash if the threshold conditions for
pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle
has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can
help tighten the safety belts in a side or rear crash.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Push down on the
release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
The adjuster can be moved
up by pushing up on the
shoulder belt guide.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, They will need to be replaced,
and probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the shoulder
belt away from the neck and head.
After the height adjuster is set to the desired position,
try to move it down without pressing the release
button to make sure it has locked into position.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Pull the guide upward to expose
its storage clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip.
Turn the guide and clip inward and slide them in between
the seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop
of the elastic cord exposed.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is
more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash.
For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety Belt Extender
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/
retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has been
designed for adults. Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular safety belt. For more
information, see the instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt
until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using
the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety
page 1-27 for more information. If the shoulder belt
still does not rest on the shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for the
length of the trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
• If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional
restraint a shoulder belt can provide.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{ CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips,
just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
nor its airbag system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride in vehicles, they
should have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in every
Canadian province says children up to some age must
be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
{ CAUTION:
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in
an appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury
during a crash, infants need complete support.
This is because an infant’s neck is not fully
developed and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child restraint settles
into the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an infant’s
body, the back and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a
motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety
standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger
seat is in a forward position.
additional information.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and also
the instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for
use with or without the top tether being attached. Others
require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada,
the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for your child restraint.
Top Tether Anchor
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle.
The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order
to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Rear Seat
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located on the cover.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
The top tether anchors are located under the covers
on the rear seatback filler panel. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to
a single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during a
crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce
the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install a LATCH-type
child restraint properly using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with the child
restraint and the instructions in this manual.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock,
if your vehicle has one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to
its stowed position, before folding the seat.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Press the ribbed area of the cover to open
the cover and expose the anchor.
2.3. If you have an adjustable head restraint,
raise the head restraint.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
2.4. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether over the head
restraint.
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the head restraint.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint. Secure the child in the
child restraint when and as the instructions say.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this
vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-43 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
in the vehicle using a safety belt and it uses a top tether,
on page 1-43 for top tether anchor locations.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed
in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
CAUTION: (Continued)
rear-facing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if
the right front passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward position.
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing
important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-43 for how and where to install the child
restraint using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-43
for top tether anchor locations.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must be
anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off indicator
on the passenger airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap
portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing
child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you tighten
the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbags are off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on
when the vehicle is started.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a
Child Restraint ” under Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-63 for more information.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback closest
to the door.
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following airbags:
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the right front
passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
passenger seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
the airbag, as you would be if you were sitting on
the edge of your seat or leaning forward. Safety
belts help keep you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if
you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work
with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag
for that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or roof-rail
airbags.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your vehicle.
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle
with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only
designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used
to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants.
In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail
side impact and roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these
roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in a severe frontal
impact. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rollovers or rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy
when either side of the vehicle is struck or in a severe
frontal impact.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by what
the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how quickly
the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an
electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the
bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not toward
page 1-60 for more information.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are
airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant seating positions.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
{ CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some
people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail
airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some
time after they deploy. Some components of the airbag
module may be hot for several minutes. For location of
the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
on page 1-61.
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have breathing problems but cannot get
out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from leaving
the vehicle.
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard
warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can
lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and turn the
hazard warning flashers off by using the controls for
those features.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation. Additional
windshield breakage may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is started.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for the
airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are using
remote start, to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF,
or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system turns off the right front
passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbags
and the roof-rail airbags are not affected by the
passenger sensing system.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{ CAUTION:
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat. The sensors
are designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right front passenger
frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger airbag if:
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is present in a
child restraint.
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger frontal
airbag, depending upon the person’s seating posture
and body build. Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers.
{ CAUTION:
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle
off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure
that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child
restraint into the seat cushion.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
6. Restart the vehicle.
The passenger sensing system may or may not turn
off the airbag for a child in a child restraint depending
upon the child’s seating posture and body build. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps
the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger
airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in
the Index for additional information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM
for your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A wet seat can affect the performance of the passenger
sensing system. Here is how:
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
• The passenger sensing system may turn off the
passenger airbag when liquid is soaked into the
seat. If this happens, the off indicator will be lit,
and the airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel will also be lit.
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about servicing the vehicle and
the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see
• Liquid pooled on the seat that has not soaked in
may make it more likely that the passenger sensing
system will enable (turn on) the passenger airbag
while a child restraint or child occupant is on the seat.
If the passenger airbag is turned on, the on indicator
will be lit.
{ CAUTION:
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry the seat
immediately. If the airbag readiness light is lit, do not
install a child restraint or allow anyone to occupy the seat.
safety information.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing
system. This could either prevent proper deployment
of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions, call Customer
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger’s
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag sensors,
sensing and diagnostic module and airbag wiring.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-35 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings. If there
are any opened or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced.
For the location of the airbag modules, see
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you
in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if
the safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped),
was not being used at the time of the crash.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
CAUTION: (Continued)
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keyless access
transmitter in the vehicle and they could be
seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave the keyless access
transmitter in a vehicle with children.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keyless
access transmitter is dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the power windows or
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One of the following keys come with the vehicle.
To remove the key, press
the button (A) near the
bottom of the keyless
access transmitter, and
pull the key out. Never
pull the key out without
pressing the button.
This key is used for the
driver door, ignition, and
glove box.
This vehicle may have the Keyless Access System.
for information on starting the vehicle.
This key, located inside the
keyless access transmitter,
is used for the driver door,
glove box, and rear seat
pass-through door.
See “Rear Seat
Pass-Through Door”
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
for more information.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the driver door. If K is
pressed again within five seconds, all remaining doors
unlock. The interior lamps come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 65 feet (20 m) away from the vehicle.
There are other conditions that can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps flash twice
to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle
V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and hold for
about one second to unlock the trunk. The automatic
transmission must be in P (Park) or the manual
transmission must be in Neutral with the parking
brake set.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds for 30 seconds. The alarm turns off
when the ignition is moved to START or L is pressed
again. The ignition must be in LOCK/OFF for the panic
alarm to work.
Do not pull on the chrome base of the transmitter.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the parking lamps may flash once to indicate locking has
occurred. The horn may chirp when Q is pressed again
page 3-71 for additional information.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on top of it, “1” or “2”.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will be
recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”, if enabled
through the DIC. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
page 3-71 for more information.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to the vehicle
will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to the vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be programmed. Any lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed.
Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters
To replace the battery:
programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch, located above the
metal base.
Battery Replacement
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
Replace the battery if the Replace Battery In Remote
Key message displays in the DIC. See “Replace Battery
In Remote Key” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-57 for additional information.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing up.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever notice a decrease in the keyless access
transmitter range, try doing one of the following:
Keyless Access System
Your vehicle may have a Keyless Access System
that operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and
with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check to make sure that an electronic device such
as a cellular phone or lap top computer is not
causing interference.
1. This device may not cause interference.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer/retailer
or a qualified technician for service.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the keyless access transmitter in range, pull the
rear door handle once to unlock the door and a second
time to open the door.
Keyless Access System Operation
The Keyless Access System transmitter functions
will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
To customize which doors unlock when the driver’s door
handle is pulled, see “Keyless Unlock” under DIC
The Keyless Access System lets you lock and unlock
the doors and access the trunk without removing the
remote transmitter from your pocket, purse, briefcase,
etc. The keyless access transmitter must be within
3 feet (1 m) of the door or trunk being opened.
Keyless Locking
The doors lock after several seconds if all doors are
closed and at least one keyless access transmitter
has been removed from the interior of the vehicle.
To customize whether the doors automatically lock
when you exit the vehicle, see “Keyless Locking”
Keyless Unlocking
With the keyless access transmitter in range, approach
the front door to unlock it and pull the handle to open
the door. All doors will unlock when you approach
the vehicle with the keyless access transmitter and
open the driver’s door.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the vehicle so the turn signal indicators do
Keyless Trunk Opening
not flash and the horn does not sound when pressing Q
on the keyless access transmitter, see “Remote Door
page 3-71.
Press the trunk release button located on the trunk
lid above the license plate to open the trunk if the
keyless access transmitter is within range.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Keyless Access
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door.
The turn signal indicators flash twice.
Press K twice within five seconds to unlock all the
doors. The interior lamps may come on.
To program the vehicle so the turn signal indicators
do not flash and the fog lamps and reverse lamps remain
on steady for about 20 seconds when the keyless
access transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle, see
For vehicles with the memory feature, press K on the
keyless access transmitter to program and recall the
memory settings. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering
With Remote Start
Shown, Without Similar
/ (Remote Start): Press to operate the remote start
additional information.
Q (Lock): Press once to lock the doors. The turn signal
indicators flash. When Q is pressed twice, the turn
signal indicators flash twice, and the horn sounds once
to confirm locking.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
G (Trunk): Press and hold for about one second
to unlock the trunk. If the engine is running, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) for an automatic transmission
or in Neutral with the parking brake set for a manual
transmission.
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only keyless access transmitters programmed to
the vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen,
a replacement can be purchased and programmed
through your dealer/retailer. The vehicle can be
reprogrammed so that lost or stolen transmitters
no longer work. Each vehicle can have up to four
transmitters matched to it.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The horn sounds three times and
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
Press and hold L for three seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the turn signal lamps flash
for 30 seconds. Press and release L again to stop the
alarm.
Programming with a Recognized
Transmitter
A new transmitter can be programmed to the vehicle
when there is one recognized transmitter. For vehicles
sold in Canada, two recognized transmitters are
required to program a new transmitter.
The vehicle comes with two transmitters. Each
transmitter will have a number on top of it, “1” or “2”.
These numbers correspond to the driver of the vehicle.
For example, the memory seat position for driver 1 will
be recalled when using the transmitter labeled “1”,
if enabled through the DIC. See Memory Seat, Mirrors
1. The vehicle must be off.
2. Both the recognized and new transmitters must be
with you.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder
located on the outside of the driver door.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within
five seconds.
5. The Driver Information Center (DIC) displays Ready
To Learn Electronic Key #2, 3 or 4.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. A beep sounds once the transmitter is programmed.
The DIC displays Ready To Learn Electronic Key #3
or 4, or Maximum # Electronic Keys Learned.
8. Press the ignition control knob to exit
programming mode.
9. Remove the transmitter from the transmitter pocket
and press K on the keyless access transmitter
two times.
10. To program additional transmitters, repeat Steps 6
through 9.
Programming without a Recognized
Transmitter
United States owners are permitted to program a new
transmitter to their vehicle when a recognized transmitter
is not available. The Canadian immobilizer standard
requires that Canadian owners see their dealer/retailer
for programming new transmitters when two recognized
transmitters are not available.
6. Place the new transmitter into the transmitter
pocket with the buttons facing the front of the
vehicle. The transmitter pocket is inside the center
console storage area located between the driver
and front passenger seats.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The procedure requires three, ten minute cycles to
complete the matching process.
6. Press the ignition switch in.
7. The DIC reads Learn Delay Active Wait XX Min and
counts down to zero.
1. The vehicle must be off.
8. The DIC displays Press Start Control To Learn
Keys again.
9. Press the ignition switch in again.
10. Repeat Steps 7, 8 and 9.
11. The DIC reads Learn Delay Active Wait XX Min and
counts down to zero.
12. A beep sounds and the DIC reads Ready To Learn
Electronic Key # X. All previously known transmitter
programming has been erased.
13. A beep sounds once programming is complete.
The DIC displays Ready To Learn Electronic Key # 2.
To program additional transmitters, insert each
transmitter in the pocket until a beep is heard and
the DIC advances to the next electronic key number.
Up to four transmitters can be programmed. The
DIC displays Maximum # Electronic Keys Learned
and exits the programming mode.
2. Place the new transmitter into the transmitter
pocket with the buttons facing the front of the
vehicle. The transmitter pocket is inside the center
console storage area located between the driver
and front passenger seats.
Press the ignition control knob to complete the
process.
3. Insert the vehicle key into the key lock cylinder
located on the driver door.
14. Press the ignition control knob if programming is
complete.
4. Turn the key to the unlock position five times within
five seconds.
15. Press K on each newly programmed transmitter to
5. The DIC displays Press Start Control To
Learn Keys.
complete the process.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting the Vehicle with a Low
Transmitter Battery
Battery Replacement
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
Replace the battery if the Replace Battery In Remote
Key message displays in the DIC. See “Replace Battery
In Remote Key” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-57 for additional information.
If the transmitter battery is weak, the DIC may display
Electronic Key Not Detected when you try to start
the vehicle. To start the vehicle, place the transmitter in
the center console storage area transmitter pocket
with the buttons facing to the front of the vehicle. Then,
with the vehicle in P (Park) or N (Neutral), press the
brake pedal and the ignition control knob. See Starting
about the vehicle’s electronic keyless ignition with push
start. Replace the transmitter battery as soon as
possible.
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the slot on the side or back of the
transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has
been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is
still running, to extend the engine running time by
10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time.
Remote Vehicle Start
This vehicle may have a remote starting feature that
allows you to start the engine from outside the vehicle.
It may also start the vehicle’s automatic climate
control system. When the remote start system is active,
the climate control system heats and cools the inside of
the vehicle according to the previous settings of the
system before turning the vehicle off. The windshield
defroster and/or rear window defogger turn on if it is cold
outside. If the vehicle has heated seats, they also turn
on if the interior or exterior temperature is cold enough.
additional information. Normal operation of the climate
control system returns after the ignition is turned to
page 3-24.
If the vehicle is left running it automatically shuts off after
10 minutes unless a time extension has been done.
To manually shut off a remote start:
• Aim the transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
When you enter the vehicle during a remote start, press
the brake pedal and turn the ignition to ON/RUN to
drive the vehicle.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require
a person using remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for any
requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
transmitter if the vehicle has remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s Q , then
Do not use the remote start feature if the vehicle is low
on fuel. The vehicle may run out of fuel.
immediately press and hold the transmitter’s / for
at least four seconds or until the vehicle’s turn signal
lamps flash. The vehicle’s doors will be locked.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps turn on
and remain on while the vehicle is running.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The remote vehicle start feature provides two separate
starts, each with 10 minutes of engine running, or it
provides one start with 10 minutes of engine running
that may be extended 10 more minutes. If the transmitter
lock button is pressed and released and then the remote
start button is pressed and held again before the first
10 minutes of engine running time has expired,
10 minutes are added to the remaining minutes.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after five minutes of
the engine run time, 10 minutes are added and you
now have 15 minutes of engine running. The added
ten minutes are considered a second remote
vehicle start.
The remote start feature does not operate if any of the
following occur:
• The ignition is in any position other than LOCK/OFF.
• A keyless access transmitter is inside the vehicle.
• The hood is open.
• There is an emission control system malfunction.
The engine turns off during a remote vehicle start if the
coolant temperature gets too high, or the oil pressure
is too low.
If this vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions have an increased range of
operation. However, the range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
Once two remote starts or a single start with a time
extension have been used, the vehicle must be started
normally before the remote start feature can be used
again.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information when using remote start in a closed garage.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the vehicle.
Doors and Locks
From the inside, use the manual lock levers located
on the door panels near the windows.
Door Locks
Push down on the manual lock lever to lock the door.
To unlock the door, pull up on the lever.
If the windows are down and the doors are locked, do
not reach in to manually unlock the vehicle because you
will set off the alarm.
{ CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
From the outside, use the key, or press the lock or
unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle.
When a door is locked, the handle will not open
it. The chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are
not locked. So, all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and the doors should be
locked whenever the vehicle is driven.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever
leaving it.
On vehicles with the Remote Keyless Access system,
the door unlocks by pulling the door handle when
you have the transmitter with you. See Keyless Access
Central Door Unlocking System
The vehicle has a central door unlocking feature.
When unlocking the driver door, the other doors can
be unlocked by holding the key in the turned position
for a few seconds or by quickly turning the key twice
in the lock cylinder.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow down or stop your vehicle.
Locking your doors can help prevent this from
happening.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
On vehicles with power door locks, the switches are
located on the front doors.
If the vehicle has an automatic transmission, the vehicle
is programmed so that the doors will lock automatically
when all doors are closed, the ignition is on, and the
shift lever is moved out of P (Park). The doors will
automatically unlock when the vehicle is stopped
and the shift lever is moved into P (Park).
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, the vehicle is
programmed so that the doors will lock automatically
after the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km). The doors
will automatically unlock when the ignition is turned
off and the key is removed from the ignition.
Delayed Locking
With this feature, you can delay the actual locking of the
doors.
When the power door lock switch is pressed when the
key is not in the ignition and the driver door is opened,
a chime will sound three times indicating that delayed
locking is active.
If someone needs to exit the vehicle once the doors
are locked, have that person use the manual lever
or power door lock switch. When the door is closed
again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual
lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door.
When all the doors are closed, the doors will lock
automatically after five seconds. If a door is reopened
before five seconds have elapsed, the five second timer
will reset itself once all the doors are closed again.
The power door locks can be programmed through
prompts displayed on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). For more information on programming,
You can press the door lock switch again or the lock
button on the RKE transmitter to override this feature
and lock the doors immediately.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on:
Rear Door Security Locks
The vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
1. Unlock the door using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) or Keyless Access System transmitter,
if the vehicle has one, the power door lock
switch, or the rear door manual lock.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each rear
door. The rear doors must
be open to access them.
The label showing lock
and unlock positions
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
is located near the lock.
Lockout Protection
If the power door lock switch is pressed when the key
is in the ignition and a door is open, all the doors will lock
and only the driver door will unlock. If the doors are
closed, they can be locked by using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. Be sure to remove the key from
the ignition when locking the vehicle.
Lock Label shown
To set the locks:
This feature can be overridden by pressing the lock
button on the RKE transmitter or by pressing the power
lock switch a second time.
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
On vehicles with a Keyless Access System, the system
can be programmed to alert you when all the doors
are closed and a transmitter has been left inside of the
for more information.
2. Close the door.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trunk Lock Release
Trunk
The remote trunk release
button is located on the
lower portion of the
driver door.
{ CAUTION:
Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven
with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any
objects that pass through the seal between the
body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or
trunk/hatch open:
• Close all of the windows.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
To use the remote trunk release, the shift lever must be
in P (Park) or N (Neutral) for a vehicle with an automatic
transmission. The shift lever must be in N (Neutral),
with the parking brake set for a vehicle with a manual
transmission.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the button to open the trunk. You can also
press the button with the trunk symbol on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to open the trunk.
On vehicles with a rear seat pass-through door:
1. Fold the rear armrest down and open the
pass-through door. See “Rear-Seat Pass Through”
following for more information.
With the Keyless Access System, when you have the
transmitter, the trunk can be opened by the trunk release
button located on the rear of the trunk above the license
plate. The vehicle must be in P (Park) and the valet mode
turned off.
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate the
emergency trunk release handle. See “Emergency
Trunk Release Handle” for more information.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to open
the trunk lid.
If the vehicle is locked, the keyless access transmitter
must be within 3 feet (1 meter) of the trunk opening for it
to be recognized and allow the trunk to open.
On vehicles with a split folding rear seat:
If the vehicle is ever without power, the trunk area
can still be accessed by using one of the following
procedures.
2. Reach upward through the opening to locate the
trunk release handle.
3. Pull forward on the trunk release handle to open
the trunk lid.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
Close the trunk by pulling on the handle. Do not use the
handle as a tie-down.
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only intended
to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk, enabling
them to open the trunk from the inside.
Rear-Seat Pass Through
If the vehicle has the rear seat-pass through door,
the trunk can be accessed through the rear seat.
This is useful when transporting long items.
To open the door, pull down the rear seat armrest.
Then pull the lever all the way down to release the door.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the back wall of the trunk. This handle
will glow following exposure to light. Pull the release
handle toward the front of the vehicle to open the trunk
from the inside.
To close the door, push it up and back into place.
Then try to open the door without pulling up on the lever
to make sure it is locked into place.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power window
switches are located on
the driver door.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window.
Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
In addition, each door has a switch for its own window.
The front power window switch operates with two
positions for both up and down movement and the rear
power window switch operates with one position for up
and two positions for down movement. Press the switch
to the first position to lower the window to the desired
level. Pull the switch up to raise the window.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
that allows you to use the power windows once
the ignition has been turned off. For more information,
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down/Up Windows
Express Window Anti-Pinch Override
Windows with the express feature allow the windows to
be raised and lowered all the way without holding
the switch.
{ CAUTION:
Press or pull the switch fully and release it to activate
the express feature.
If express override is activated, the window will
not reverse automatically. You or others could be
injured and the window could be damaged. Before
you use express override, make sure that all people
and obstructions are clear of the window path.
The express mode can be canceled at any time by
briefly pressing or pulling the switch.
Express Window Anti-Pinch Feature
If any object is in the path of the window when
the express-up is active, the window will stop at the
obstruction and auto-reverse to a preset factory position.
Weather conditions such as severe icing may also cause
the window to auto-reverse. The window will return to
normal operation once the obstruction or condition is
removed.
In an emergency, the anti-pinch feature can be
overridden in a supervised mode. Hold the window
switch all the way up to the second position. The window
will rise for as long as the switch is held. Once the
switch is released, the express mode is re-activated.
In this mode, the window can still close on an object in
its path. Use care when using the override mode.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming the Power Windows
Window Lockout
If the battery on the vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window for the express-up
feature to work. Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle’s battery.
o (Window Lockout): The rear window lockout button
is located on the driver door near the window switches.
Press the right side of the button to disable the rear
window controls. The light on the button will illuminate,
indicating the feature is in use. The rear windows
still can be raised or lowered using the driver window
switches when the lockout feature is active.
To program each front window, follow these steps:
1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
active, close all doors.
To restore power to the rear windows, press the button
again. The light on the button will go out.
2. Press and hold the power window switch until the
window is fully open.
Sun Visors
3. Pull the power window switch up until the window is
fully closed.
Swing down the visor to block out glare. It can also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the
side to block glare from that direction.
4. Continue holding the switch up for approximately
two seconds after the window is completely closed.
The driver visor may also have buttons for a built-in
garage door opener. See Universal Home Remote
The window is now reprogrammed. Repeat the process
for the other windows.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull the visor down and lift the cover to access the
mirror. A light comes on when the cover is lifted and
goes out when it is closed.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a locked door or trunk is opened without using the
key in the driver’s door key cylinder or the transmitter, a
ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn will chirp and
the lights will flash. If the key is not placed in the ignition
and turned to START or the door is not unlocked by
pressing the unlock button on the transmitter during the
ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s
headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about
30 seconds, then will turn off to save the battery power.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
Theft-Deterrent System
If your vehicle has this
feature, the security light is
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if the power door lock switch
is used while the door is open or with the transmitter.
You should also remember that you can start your
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has
been set off.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
To activate the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
• Lock the vehicle with the door key after the doors
are closed.
2. Lock the door with the transmitter. The security light
should come on and stay on.
• Always unlock a door with the transmitter. Unlocking
a door any other way will set off the alarm.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm by
pressing the unlock button on the transmitter. The alarm
will not stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Testing the Alarm
Immobilizer
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
transmitter.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch will
not work.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works.
The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse,
Fuses and Circuit Breakers.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do
not flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is possible for the theft-deterrent system decoder to
learn the transponder value of a new or replacement
key. Up to 10 keys can be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only.
Immobilizer Operation (Key Access)
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
To program a new key do the following:
The theft-deterrent system is disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN.
1. Verify that the new key has 1 stamped on it.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
2. Insert the current driver’s key in the ignition and
start the engine. If the engine will not start see
your dealer/retailer for service.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
The key uses a transponder that matches an immobilizer
control unit in your vehicle and automatically disarms
the system. Only the correct key will start the vehicle.
If the key is ever damaged, you may not be able to
start your vehicle.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
ON/RUN within five seconds of the ignition being
turned to LOCK/OFF in Step 3.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be a
problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that
the security light went on due to how quickly the
key is programmed.
6. Repeat the Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are
to be programmed.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
theft-deterrent system and have a new key made.
In an emergency, contact Cadillac Roadside Service.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition control knob does not rotate, and the
keyless access transmitter appears to be undamaged,
try another keyless access transmitter. Or, you may
try placing the transmitter in the transmitter pocket
located in the center console. See “Electronic Key
page 3-57. At this time, you may also want to check the
If the ignition control knob still does not rotate with the
other transmitter, your vehicle needs service. If the
ignition control knob does rotate, the first transmitter
may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service
the theft-deterrent system and have a new keyless
access transmitter programmed to the vehicle.
Immobilizer Operation
(Keyless Access)
Your vehicle has a passive theft-deterrent system.
The system is automatically armed when the ignition
control knob is turned to LOCK/OFF.
The immobilization system is disarmed when the ignition
control knob is pushed in and a valid transmitter is
found in the vehicle.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
It is possible for the immobilizer system to learn new or
replacement keyless access transmitters. Up to 4 keyless
access transmitters can be programmed for the vehicle.
To program additional transmitters, see “Matching
transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under Keyless Access
The system has one or more keyless access
transmitters that are matched to an immobilizer control
unit in your vehicle. Only a correctly matched keyless
access transmitter will start the vehicle. If the keyless
access transmitter is ever damaged, you may not
be able to start your vehicle.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine does not
start and the security light comes on, there may be
a problem with your immobilizer system. Turn the
ignition control knob off and try again.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
• Keep your speed at 70 mph (113 km/h) or less for
the first 1,500 miles (2 414km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake
or slow the vehicle.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only position in which the
key can be inserted or removed. This position locks the
ignition and shifter on automatic transmission vehicles,
and the ignition and steering wheel on manual
transmission vehicles.
Ignition Positions (Key Access)
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets you use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers when
the engine is off. This position allows you to turn off the
engine.
C (ON/RUN): This position is for driving. It is the
position the ignition switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the key is released.
To shift the transmission out of P (Park), the ignition key
has to be in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN.
The battery could be drained if the key is left in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not start if the battery is allowed
to drain for an extended period of time.
The key can be turned to four different positions.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal
must be applied.
D (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch
returns to ON/RUN for driving.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from its
cylinder could cause damage or break the key.
Use the correct key and turn the key only with your
hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If it is
and you have a manual transmission vehicle, turn
the steering wheel left and right while you turn
the key hard. If none of this works, then the vehicle
needs service.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A (LOCK/OFF): The ignition control knob cannot
be removed from the vehicle. The keyless access
transmitter must be inside the vehicle to start the engine.
This position locks the ignition and shifter on automatic
transmission vehicles, and the ignition and steering wheel
on manual transmission vehicles.
Ignition Positions (Keyless Access)
You can turn the ignition control knob to four different
positions.
To shift out of P (Park), ignition must be in the ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must
be applied.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position allows you to
use things like the radio and the windshield wipers
when the engine is off. This position will allow you
to turn off the engine.
C (ON/RUN): This position is for driving. It is the
position the ignition switch returns to after the engine
starts, and the control knob is released.
If you need to shift the transmission out of P (Park), the
ignition control knob has to be in ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in
the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the
battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
Using a tool to force the ignition control knob from its
cylinder could damage it.
Make sure the keyless access transmitter is inside the
vehicle when trying to turn the ignition control knob.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, put your
foot on the brake pedal and turn the ignition control
knob to the START position. When the engine begins
cranking, let go of the ignition control knob, it will return
to the ON/RUN position.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
Power to the audio system will work up to 10 minutes or
until the driver door is opened. Power to the windows or
sunroof will work up to 10 minutes or until any door
is opened. For an additional 10 minutes of operation,
close all the doors and turn the key to ON/RUN and
then back to LOCK/OFF.
If the transmitter is not in the vehicle or something is
interfering with the transmitter, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will display Electronic Key Not Detected.
more information.
If the battery in the keyless access transmitter
needs replacing, the DIC displays Replace Battery In
Remote Key. The vehicle can still be driven. See “Battery
Replacement” under Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-9 for more information.
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, the keyless
access transmitter must be authenticated in order for the
ignition control knob to turn. The transmitter can be
authenticated either by putting your foot on the brake
pedal or by pushing the ignition control knob in.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The shift lever should be in neutral position and the
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal down to
the floor and start the engine. The vehicle will not start
if the clutch pedal is not all the way down.
Automatic Transmission
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral).
The engine will not start in any other position.
To restart the engine when the vehicle is already
moving, use N (Neutral) only.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. If the vehicle has the keyless
access system, push the ignition control knob in and
turn the knob to the START position. When the
engine starts, let go of the ignition. The idle speed
will go down as your engine gets warm. Do not race
the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to
warm up and lubricate all moving parts.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If the vehicle
starts briefly but then stops again, do the same thing.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently until
the oil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking will be stopped
after 15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{ CAUTION:
Vehicles with the engine coolant heater can use this
option in cold weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C)
for easier starting and better fuel economy during engine
warm-up. Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours
before starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above
0°F (−18°C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located near the driver side strut tower.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
Remove the plastic cap to access the plug.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Contact your dealer/retailer for information on how long
to use the heater in your particular area.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{ CAUTION:
The shift lever is located on the center console between
the front seats.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the shift lever.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-29.
P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine because
the vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in P (Park) before
starting the engine. The vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You must
fully apply the regular brakes first and then press
the shift lever button before you can shift from
P (Park) when the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way into
P (Park) as you maintain brake application. Then press
the shift lever button and move the shift lever into another
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when the vehicle is
already moving, use N (Neutral) only. You can also
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
At low vehicle speeds, R (Reverse) can be used to rock
the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow, ice, or
sand without damaging your transmission. See If Your
page 4-20 for additional information.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage the
transmission. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It provides
the best fuel economy. If you need more power for
passing, and you are:
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at high RPMs
without upshifting while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the vehicle. Always upshift
when necessary while using DSC.
• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
The transmission will shift down to a lower gear and
have more power.
Driver Shift Control (DSC) allows you to shift an
automatic transmission similar to a manual transmission.
To use the DSC feature:
1. Move the shift lever to the right from D (Drive) to
M (Manual Mode).
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see Skidding under Loss of
Control on page 4-12
Once in M (Manual Mode), if you do not move the
shift lever forward or rearward, the vehicle will be
in sport mode. When you are in sport mode the
vehicle will still shift automatically. The transmission
may remain in a gear longer than it would in the
normal driving mode based on braking, throttle
input, and vehicle lateral acceleration.
While in D (Drive), the CTS-V vehicle’s first forward
gear automatic shift after starting the vehicle will be from
1 (First). Afterwards, the CTS-V vehicles will always
start in 2 (Second) gear. While in M (Manual Mode),
for increased performance, the vehicle will start in
1 (First) gear.
SPORT MODE will be displayed in the DIC
momentarily. The vehicle will remain in sport
mode if the shift lever is not moved. Sport mode
will shift automatically but remain in a gear longer
then it would in normal driving mode based on
braking and acceleration.
M (Manual Mode): This position allows the driver to
select the range of gears appropriate for current driving
conditions. If the vehicle has this feature, see Driver
Shift Control (DSC) later in this section.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the
brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2. Press the shift lever forward to upshift or rearward
to downshift.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While using the DSC feature, the vehicle will have
firmer, quicker shifting. You can use this for sport driving
or when climbing or descending hills, to stay in gear
longer, or to down shift for more power or engine
braking.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will
not automatically shift to the next lower gear if the engine
RPM is too high, nor to the next higher gear when the
maximum engine RPM is reached.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that
the transmission has not shifted gears.
The tachometer display on the instrument panel
cluster will show which gear the vehicle is in.
The number indicates the requested gear range
when moving the shift lever forward or rearward.
for more information on the odometer.
While in the DSC mode, the CTS automatic transmission
will automatically downshift when the vehicle comes
to a stop. This will allow for more power during take-off.
The CTS-V automatic transmission will not automatically
downshift on hard acceleration when in DSC mode.
CTS-V vehicles use tracer lights around the outside of
the tachometer as a performance up-shift light. These
tracers flash to indicate when to shift to the next higher
gear to avoid the engine speed limit. See Tachometer
on page 3-33 for more information.
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you to gain more traction
on slippery surfaces.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CTS-V vehicles use tracer lights around the outside
of the tachometer as a performance up-shift light.
These tracers flash to indicate when to shift to the
next higher gear to avoid the engine speed limit.
Tap Shift
While using the Tap Shift feature, the vehicle will have
firmer, quicker shifting for increased performance.
You can use this for sport driving or when climbing or
descending hills, to stay in gear longer, or to down shift
for more power or engine braking.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into
gears appropriate for the vehicle speed and engine
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM). The transmission will
not automatically shift to the next lower gear if the
engine RPM is too high, nor to the next higher gear
when the maximum engine RPM is reached.
To use Tap Shift, the shift lever must be in Manual
Mode. Vehicles with this feature have switches on
the back of the steering wheel. Tap the left switch to
downshift, and the right switch to upshift.
If shifting is prevented for any reason, the currently
selected gear will flash multiple times, indicating that
the transmission has not shifted gears.
The tachometer display on the instrument panel cluster
will show which gear the vehicle is in and a number
indicating the requested gear range when moving
the shift lever forward or rearward. See Speedometer
the odometer.
While in the Tap Shift mode, the transmission will not
automatically downshift on hard acceleration.
When accelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowy
and icy conditions, you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear ratio allows you to gain more traction
on slippery surfaces.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on the
accelerator pedal and shift into 2 (Second). Then, slowly
let up on the clutch pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
Manual Transmission Operation
If the vehicle has a manual transmission, the shift lever
is located on the center console between the front seats.
The following explains how to operate the manual
transmission.
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth): Shift into
3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the same
way you do for 2 (Second). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when you start or idle your
engine. Your shift lever is in Neutral when it is centered
in the shift pattern, not in any gear.
R (Reverse): To back up, press down the clutch pedal,
completely stop the vehicle, and shift into R (Reverse).
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
CTS
CTS-V
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal and shift into 1 (First).
Then slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press
the accelerator pedal.
The CTS-V transmission prevents you from easily
shifting into R (Reverse) using normal shifting force
while the vehicle is moving at more than 3 mph (5 km/h),
or when the ignition is in LOCK/OFF.
Shift into 1 (First) when you are going less than
25 mph (40 km/h). For CTS-V, shift into 1 (First) when
you are going less than 40 mph (64 km/h). If you come
to a complete stop and it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put
the shift lever in Neutral and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into 1 (First).
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Up-Shift Light
Shift Speeds (Manual Transmission)
CTS vehicles with a
manual transmission have
an economy up-shift light
on the instrument panel.
This light shows when to
shift to the next higher gear
for the best fuel economy.
{ CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you could
lose control of the vehicle. You could injure yourself
or others. Do not shift down more than one gear at
a time when you downshift.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions allow.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and
shift when the light comes on.
Notice: If you skip more than one gear when
you downshift, or if you race the engine when you
release the clutch pedal while downshifting, you
could damage the engine, clutch, driveshaft or the
transmission. Do not skip gears or race the engine
when downshifting.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go
on and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.
CTS-V vehicles use tracer lights around the outside of
the tachometer as a performance up-shift light. These
tracers flash to indicate when to shift to the next higher
page 3-33 for more information.
If the vehicle speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h),
or if the engine is not running smoothly, you should
downshift to the next lower gear. You may have
to downshift two or more gears to keep the engine
running smoothly or for good performance.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Skip Shift (CTS-V)
Under light acceleration, the transmission will only allow
you to shift from 1 (First) to 4 (Fourth). Shifts from
1 (First) to 2 (Second) or 3 (Third) are not allowed.
This helps improve fuel mileage.
Under harder acceleration, Skip Shift is disabled, and
the driver has all gears available.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located on the lower portion
of the instrument panel to
the left of the steering
wheel.
To release the parking brake, pull the release lever
located to the left of the steering wheel on the instrument
panel.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,
then push the parking brake pedal down.
A warning chime will sound if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on, and the vehicle begins to move.
To stop the chime, fully release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light on
the instrument panel cluster should come on. If it does
not, you need to have the vehicle serviced. See Brake
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see
Vehicles with
the Electric
Parking Brake
(EPB) have
a switch in the
center console.
Electric Parking Brake
{ CAUTION:
On vehicles with a manual transmission, releasing
the clutch and pressing the accelerator will release
the Electric Parking Brake. If the vehicle is not in a
gear, the vehicle could move, and you or others
could be injured. Make sure the vehicle is in a
gear before attempting to drive away. To avoid
unexpected vehicle movement, do not partially
release the clutch or press the accelerator pedal
until you are ready to release the parking brake
and drive away.
The EPB takes the place of the manual parking brake
system, the foot pedal and release handle. The system
has two warning lights and five Driver Information
Center (DIC) messages. See Brake System Warning
on page 3-57 for more information. In case of insufficient
electrical power, the EPB cannot be applied or released.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this light is flashing, the EPB is only partially applied
or released, or there is a problem with the EPB. The DIC
message “Service Park Brake” will be displayed. If this
light is flashing, release the EPB, and attempt to apply it
again. If this light continues to flash, do not drive the
vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.
EPB Apply
The EPB can be applied any time the vehicle is stopped.
The EPB is applied by momentarily lifting up on the
EPB switch. Once fully applied, the BRAKE light will be
on, and the DIC message “Park Brake Set” will be
displayed. If the light does not come on, or is flashing,
you need to have the vehicle serviced. Do not drive
the vehicle if the BRAKE light is flashing. See your
dealer/retailer. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-38 for more information.
If the Y light is on, the EPB has detected an error
in another system and is operating with reduced
functionality. To apply the EPB when this light is on,
lift up on the EPB switch and hold it in the up position.
Full application of the parking brake by the EPB system
may take a longer period of time than normal when
this light is on. Continue to hold the switch until the
If the EPB is applied while the vehicle is in motion, a
chime will sound, and the DIC message “Release Park
Brake Switch” will be displayed. The vehicle will
decelerate as long as the switch is held in the up position.
Releasing the EPB switch during the deceleration will
release the parking brake. If the switch is held in the up
position until the vehicle comes to a stop, the EPB will
remain applied.
BRAKE light remains on. If the Y light is on, see
your dealer/retailer.
If the EPB fails to apply, the rear wheels should be
blocked to prevent vehicle movement.
If the BRAKE light is on, either the EPB is applied,
or there is a failure in the hydraulic brake system.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPB Release
Automatic EPB Release
To release the EPB, turn the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN position, apply and hold the brake pedal,
and push down momentarily on the EPB switch.
If you attempt to release the EPB without the brake
pedal applied, a chime will sound, and the DIC message
“Press Brake Pedal to Release Park Brake” will be
displayed. The EPB is released when the BRAKE light
is off and the DIC message “Park Brake Released” is
displayed.
The EPB will automatically release if the vehicle is
running, placed into gear and an attempt is made to
drive away. Avoid rapid acceleration when the EPB
is applied, to preserve park brake lining life.
The EPB can also be used to prevent roll back for
vehicles with a manual transmission taking off on a hill.
In a situation where no roll back is desired, an applied
EPB will allow both feet to be used for the clutch and
accelerator pedals in preparation for starting the vehicle
moving in the intended direction.
If the Y light is on, the EPB has detected an error
in another system and is operating with reduced
functionality. To release the EPB when this light is on,
push down on the EPB switch and hold it in the down
position. EPB release may take a longer period of time
than normal when this light is on. Continue to hold the
In this situation, perform the normal clutch and
accelerator actions required to begin moving the
vehicle. There is no need to push the switch to
release the EPB.
If you are towing a trailer and parking on a hill, see
switch until the BRAKE light is off. If the Y light is on,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use this procedure to shift into P (Park):
Shifting Into Park
(Automatic Transmission)
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
information.
{ CAUTION:
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) by holding in the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-29.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. For vehicles with key access, remove the key and
take it with you. If you can leave the vehicle with
the ignition key in your hand, the vehicle is in
P (Park). Vehicles with the keyless access system,
take the keyless access transmitter with you.
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running (Automatic Transmission)
Torque Lock (Automatic Transmission)
Torque lock is when the weight of the vehicle puts
too much force on the parking pawl in the transmission.
This happens when parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not done properly and then
it is difficult to shift out of P (Park). To prevent torque
lock, set the parking brake and then shift into P (Park).
To find out how, see ‘‘Shifting Into P (Park)’’ listed
previously.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if
the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you leave the vehicle with
the engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not
leave the vehicle with the engine running.
If torque lock does occur, your vehicle may need to be
pushed uphill by another vehicle to relieve the parking
pawl pressure, so you can shift out of P (Park).
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
the vehicle must be in P (Park) and the parking brake
set. After shifting into P (Park), try to move the shift lever
out without first pushing the button on the shift lever.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, for vehicles with key access.
If you can, the shift lever was not fully locked into
P (Park).
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the brake pedal is applied.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
Parking the Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Before you get out of the vehicle, place the shift lever in
R (Reverse) and firmly apply the parking brake.
For vehicles with the key access ignition, turn the
ignition key to OFF/LOCK, press the release button
and remove the key. See “Key Release Button” under
information.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
For vehicles with the keyless access ignition, turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the keyless
access transmitter.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still cannot move the shift lever from P (Park),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer (CTS-V)
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things
that can burn.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the
vehicle body from damage or after-market
modifications that are not completely sealed.
Engine Exhaust
{ CAUTION:
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
{ CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if
the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set.
The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle
when the engine is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
it is on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the automatic transmission shift
lever to P (Park), or the manual transmission shift
lever to Neutral.
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For more information,
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Controls for the outside
power mirrors are located
on the driver door.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The vehicle has an automatic dimming inside rearview
mirror with OnStar® controls, located at the bottom of the
mirror. See your dealer/retailer for more information on
services OnStar provides.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
To adjust each mirrors:
Automatic dimming reduces the glare of headlamps
from behind you. The dimming feature comes on and the
indicator light illuminates each time the vehicle is started.
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver’s or passenger
side mirror.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to move the mirror to the desired direction.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror.
Use a soft towel dampened with water.
3. Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the
vehicle and the area behind it can be seen.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push
the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward,
to return to its original position.
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park Tilt Mirrors
Outside Heated Mirrors
If the vehicle has this feature, the passenger and/or
driver outside mirror tilts to a preselected position when
the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This allows the driver
to view the curb when parallel parking.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Climate
When the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse) and after
a five-second delay, the mirrors return to their original
position.
Object Detection Systems
Outside Convex Mirror
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
{ CAUTION:
For vehicles with the URPA system, it operates at
speeds less than 5mph (8 km/h), and assists the driver
with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse).
The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect
the distance to an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind
the vehicle, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off
the ground.
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could
hit a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The display is located
above the rear window and
can be seen by looking
over your right shoulder.
{ CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
It cannot detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are
too close or far from the vehicle
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
How the System Works
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly
illuminates to indicate the system is working.
Description
amber light
English
8 ft
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
0.6 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph
(8 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the
red light on the rear display will flash.
amber/amber lights
amber/amber/red lights
40 in
23 in
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below trunk level. Objects
must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear bumper.
This distance may be less during warmer or humid
weather.
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and beep for
five seconds
1 ft
0.3 m
The system can be disabled through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Park Assist” under
information.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 23 inches (0.6 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur for a short time when the
vehicle is closer than 1 foot (0.3 m) from the object.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on
the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions:
• The driver disables the system.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good
for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route,
is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button
to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the trunk during the last
drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in the rear
display. Once the attached object is removed, URPA
will return to normal operation.
• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
If the system is still disabled after driving forward at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available
until the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar.
After the first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select
a monthly or annual subscription payment plan.
If a payment plan is not selected, the OnStar system
and all services, including airbag notification and
emergency services, may be deactivated and no
longer available. For more information visit onstar.com
(U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada), or press the OnStar
button to speak with an advisor.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles.
To check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S.
or a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few simple
voice commands to browse through the various topics.
See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information.
This feature is only available in the continental U.S.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
for more information.
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
How OnStar Service Works
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is pressed,
the emergency button is pressed, or if the airbags or
AACN system deploy. This information usually includes
the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the event of a crash,
additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle
was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle
was hit). When the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling is used, the vehicle also sends
OnStar the vehicle’s GPS location so they can provide
services where it is located.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons
is red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place where
the wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity and reception when
the service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
To program up to three devices:
When programming a garage door, park outside of the
garage. Park directly in line with and facing the garage
door opener motor-head or gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate
that is being programmed.
1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the
two outside buttons at the same time, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote indicator
light begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step
will erase the factory settings or all previously
programmed buttons.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
For questions or help programming the Universal
Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515 or go
to www.homelink.com.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal
Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied
by the manufacturer of your garage door opener
receiver (motor head unit).
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out
and the procedure will have to be repeated.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal
Home Remote button to be used to control the
garage door and the hand-held transmitter button.
Do not release the Universal Home Remote button
or the hand-held transmitter button until Step 4 has
been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require substitution of Step 3 with the
procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,
locate inside the garage the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
the programming is complete and the garage door
should move when the Universal Home Remote
button is pressed and released. There is no need
to continue programming Steps 6 through 8.
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light
blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to
a constant light, continue with the programming
Steps 6 through 8.
It may be helpful to have another person assist with
the remaining steps.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 8.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and
hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in
Step 3 to control the garage door, for two seconds,
and then release it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the same button a second
time for two seconds, and then release it. Again, if
the door does not move, press and hold the same
button a third time for two seconds, and then release.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with the
following:
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the Universal
Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1, as this will
erase all previous programming from the Universal Home
Remote buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Universal Home Remote
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with Step 2.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
Home Remote device:
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open, press the button. Use the key to lock and
unlock. The glove box has a shelf that can be removed
by pulling it out.
Cupholders
The vehicle has cupholders located in front of the center
console. Push down on the cover to open. There are
also cupholders in the rear center armrest. Pull the
armrest down to use.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Storage
Sunroof
Your vehicle has a storage area located below the
climate control systems. To access, push on the lid.
If the vehicle has a power sunroof it will only operate
when the ignition is turned on, or in ACC/ACCESSORY,
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
Center Console Storage
The sunroof switches are located on the overhead
console.
Your vehicle has a center console with an upper and
lower storage area. To access the upper storage area,
lift the driver side lever on the front of the console
and lift the cover. To access the lower storage area,
lift the passenger side lever on the center console.
There is an additional storage area behind the center
console. To access, push the cover.
The driver side switch
operates the sunshade.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear
of the vehicle. Put small loads behind the net. It can also
be positioned into an envelope style to hold smaller
items. The net is not for heavier loads. Store items as
far forward as you can.
Press and hold the rear of the switch to open the
sunshade. Press and hold the front of the switch to
close the sunshade.
Express-Open: To open the sunshade, fully press and
release the rear of the driver side switch. The sunshade
will automatically open. To stop the sunshade partway,
press the switch a second time.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Close: To close the sunshade, fully press and
release the front of the driver side switch. The sunshade
will automatically close. To stop the sunshade partway,
press the switch a second time.
Comfort Stop Feature: The sunroof has a comfort
stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to
the full-open position. From the comfort stop position,
press the rear of the passenger side switch a second
time to open the sunroof to the full-open position.
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.
On vehicles equipped with an air deflector, it
automatically raises when the sunroof opens and
retracts when the sunroof closes.
The passenger side switch
operates the sunroof.
Vent Feature: Press and hold the front of
the passenger side switch to vent the sunroof.
The sunshade will automatically open approximately
one and a half inches. Press and hold the rear of the
passenger side switch to close the sunroof vent.
Anti-Pinch Feature
Express-Open: To open the sunroof, fully press
and release the rear of the passenger side switch.
The sunroof will automatically open. To stop the
sunroof partway, press the switch a second time.
If an object is in the path of the sunroof/sunshade when
it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof/sunshade from closing at the point
of the obstruction. The sunroof/sunshade will then return
to the full-open position. To close the sunroof/sunshade,
see “Express-Close” earlier in this section.
Express-Close: To close the sunroof, fully press and
release the front of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof
will automatically close. To stop the sunroof partway,
press the switch a second time.
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
System (TCS) Disable Button (CTS-V Model Only).
Q. Tap Shift Controls (CTS-V Model Only). See
on page 3-7.
G. Navigation Button (If Equipped). See Navigation
System Manual.
Magnetic Ride Control™ on page 4-9
(CTS-V Model Only).
on page 2-42.
L. Navigation Display Brightness Control (If Equipped).
See Navigation System Manual.
(If Equipped).
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the steering wheel
be adjusted.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on the instrument panel, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns
others that you are having trouble.
The tilt and telescope lever
is located on the left side
of the steering column.
Press | again to turn the flashers off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull the lever
down. Then move the steering wheel up or down
or backward or forward into a comfortable position.
Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane-Change Signals
P : Exterior Lamp Control
For vehicles with this feature, the power tilt wheel
control is located on the left side of the steering column.
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control up
or down to tilt the steering wheel up or down.
# : Fog Lamps
Push the control forward or rearward to move the
steering wheel toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
Flash-To-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
If the turn signal is left on for about 1 mile (1.6 km),
a warning chime will sound and the TURN SIGNAL ON
message will appear on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” under DIC Warnings
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Push forward on the turn signal/multifunction lever
to change the headlamps from low to high beam.
Pull the lever back and then release it to change
from high to low beam.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. Hold it briefly until the lane
change is complete. The arrow will automatically
flash three times.
If the vehicle is turned off while the high beams are on,
they will come on the next time the vehicle is started.
The highbeam light on the
instrument panel cluster,
comes on while the
high-beam headlamps
are on.
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or lane change the arrow flashes
rapidly or does not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
page 5-120.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
This feature allows the high-beam headlamps to be
used to signal the driver in front of you that you
want to pass.
Pull and hold the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you to use this feature. When this is done the following
will occur:
• If the headlamps are off, in low-beam or in
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode, the
high-beam headlamps will turn on. They will
stay on as long as the lever is held there.
Release the lever to turn them off.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers.
Move the lever to one of the following positions:
• For vehicles with High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlamps, the low-beam headlamps must be on
to activate the high-beam headlamps. See High
7 (Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. Hold the lever in this position for continuous
wiping cycles.
• If the headlamps are already in high-beam mode,
they will remain on high-beam.
& (Delay): For a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the delay
adjustment band to set the length of the delay.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rainsense™ Wipers
6 (Delay Adjustment): Use this band to set the length
of the delay between wipes when using the delay feature.
Vehicles with Rainsense windshield wipers, have a
moisture sensor for this feature mounted on the interior
side of the windshield behind the rearview mirror. This
sensor automatically operates the wipers by monitoring
the amount of moisture build-up on the windshield. Wipes
occur as needed to clear the windshield depending on
driving conditions and the sensitivity setting. In light rain
or snow, fewer wipes will occur. In heavy rain or snow,
wipes occur more frequently. If the system is left on for
long periods of time, occasional wipes may occur without
any moisture on the windshield. This is normal and
indicates that the Rainsense system is activated.
The closer the band is moved towards 7 , the longer
the delay. The windshield wiper lever must be in delay for
this feature to work.
1 (Low Speed): For slow, steady wiping cycles.
2 (High Speed): For rapid wiping cycles.
If the windshield wipers are in use for about six seconds
while you are driving, the exterior lamps come on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in AUTO.
information.
The wiper control should be left in the off position,
unless the wiper is needed.
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades before
using them. If the blades are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If they become damaged,
install new blades. For more information, see Windshield
The Rainsense system is sensitive to vibration and
can activate if something hits the windshield or if the
vehicle hits a bump.
Rainsense windshield wipers operate in a delay mode,
as well as a continuous low or high speed as needed.
Move the wiper lever up to the delay position and
turn the band to one of five settings.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The level one or lowest setting is at the bottom of the
band. This setting lets more rain or snow collect on
the windshield between wipes. Turn the delay band
forward to a higher setting to let less rain or snow
collect on the windshield between wipes.
Windshield Washer
{ CAUTION:
The top position is the highest setting. A single wipe
occurs each time the delay band is turned to a higher
setting to indicate that the Rainsense level has been
increased.
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
K (Washer Fluid): Press the button with this symbol,
located at the end of the windshield washer lever, to
wash the windshield. The washer fluid sprays onto the
windshield and the wipers run for a few cycles to clear the
The mist and wash cycles operate as normal and are
not affected by the Rainsense function. The Rainsense
system can be overridden at any time by manually
changing the wiper control to low or high speed.
The system will default to normal time delay operation
if the Rainsensor detects something that would
affect Rainsense operation.
windshield. Press and hold K for more wash cycles.
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the washer fluid is low.
When Rainsense is active, the headlamps turn
on automatically. If it is dark, they remain on. See
“Wiper-Activated Headlamps” under Wiper Activated
If the headlamps are on while the windshield is being
washed, the headlamp washers, if the vehicle has them,
will also turn on. See “Headlamp Washer” following for
more information.
Notice: Do not place stickers or other items on
the exterior glass surface directly in front of
the moisture sensor. Doing this could cause
the moisture sensor to malfunction.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
depending on the outside temperature. After the first
wipe cycle, it can take up to 20 seconds for each of the
remaining cycles. The system will automatically turn
off after four wipe cycles have been completed or
press _ again to turn it off. Heated Washer Fluid
System Off displays on the DIC. See DIC Warnings
Heated Windshield Washer
For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
or bugs from the windshield.
The button is located
on the climate control
system panel.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,
steam might flow out of the washer nozzles for a
short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed.
This is a normal condition.
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid displays on the DIC
when the washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and
Push _ to begin four heated wipe cycles. Heating
Washer Fluid Wash Wipes Pending displays on the DIC.
heated wipe cycle can take up to 40 seconds to occur,
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Washer
Cruise Control
Your vehicle may have headlamp washers.
The headlamp washers clear debris from the
headlamp lenses.
{ CAUTION:
The headlamp washers
are located beneath the
headlamps.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Pocated at the end of the
windshield wiper lever, to wash the headlamps.
Both the headlamps and the windshield will be washed.
After the first wash, the headlamps will not be washed
until the fifth press of the windshield washer button.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
turns off.
The headlamps must be on to be washed. If the
headlamps are off, only the windshield will be washed
when the washer button is pressed. If the washer fluid
is low, the headlamp washers will not work.
If the vehicle has the Stabilitrak® system and begins
to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control,
the cruise control will automatically disengage. See
allow you to safely use it again, the cruise control
can be turned back on.
information.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
Setting Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
comes on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
{ CAUTION:
CTS Shown, CTS-V
Similar
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
I (On/Off): Press to turn the system on or off.
The indicator light on the button turns on when cruise
control is on.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press to make the
vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
1. Press the I button.
2. Get up to the desired speed.
SET − (Set/Coast): Press to set the speed or make
the vehicle decelerate.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
[ (Cancel): Press to cancel cruise control without
erasing the set speed from memory.
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Suppose the cruise control is set at a desired speed
and then the brake is applied. This shuts off the cruise
control. But it does not need to be reset.
To reduce the vehicle’s speed while using cruise
control:
Once the vehicle is driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel.
The vehicle goes back to the previously set speed and
stays there.
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press
the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly.
Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the previously set cruise speed.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Headlamps
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to keep the vehicle’s speed down. When the brakes
are applied the cruise control turns off.
The exterior lamp control is located towards the end of
the turn signal/multifunction lever.
O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band with this
symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.
The exterior lamp control has four positions:
Ending Cruise Control
O (Off): Turns off all lamps, except the Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL).
There are four ways to end cruise control:
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the headlamps on and off
automatically, depending upon how much light is
available outside of the vehicle.
• Step lightly on the brake pedal (manual and
automatic transmissions).
• Press the clutch pedal to the floor (manual
transmissions).
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
• Press [ on the steering wheel.
• Press I on the steering wheel.
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
Erasing Speed Memory
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
5 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps, together
with the previously listed lamps and lights.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This feature activates the headlamps and parking
lamps after the windshield wipers have been in use
for about six seconds. For this feature to work,
the exterior lamp control must be in AUTO.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The wiper-activated headlamps immediately turn off,
when the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF or the
windshield wiper control is turned off.
The DRL system will make either the reduced intensity
low-beam headlamps or dedicated DRL’s come on
when the following conditions are met:
• It is still daylight and the ignition is in ON/RUN or
START.
Headlamps on Reminder
• The exterior lamp control is in off or AUTO and the
headlamps are off.
A warning chime will sound if the exterior lamp control
is left on in either the headlamp or parking lamp position
and the driver’s door is opened with the ignition off.
information.
• The automatic transmission is not in P (Park).
When DRL’s are on, only the reduced intensity
low-beam headlamps or dedicated DRL’s will be on.
The other exterior lamps and the instrument panel
cluster will not be on.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the exterior lamp control is in AUTO and it is dark
enough outside, the DRL turns off and the low-beam
headlamps will turn on. When it is bright enough outside,
the low-beam headlamps will go off, and the DRL will turn
back on. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the
automatic headlamp system comes on immediately.
Once the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes about one
minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to
DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, the instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
the instrument panel brightness lever is in the full bright
Light Sensor
The light sensor for the
DRL and AUTO headlamp
feature is located on top of
the instrument panel.
Turning the exterior lamp control to off or to the
low-beam headlamp position will turn off the DRL.
If the parking lamps or the fog lamps were turned
on instead, the DRL will still turn off.
If the sensor is covered, it will prevent it from sensing
light, and the exterior lamps or the Headlamps Suggested
message will appear on the DIC whenever the ignition
is on.
This will work regardless of gear position and whether
or not the parking brake is set.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The parking lamps must be on for the fog lamps
to work.
Adaptive Forward Lighting System
The Adaptive Forward Lighting System (AFL) pivots
the headlamps horizontally to provide greater road
illumination while turning. To enable AFL, set the
exterior lamp switch on the multifunction lever to the
AUTO position. Moving the switch out of the AUTO
position will deactivate the system. AFL will operate
when the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h).
AFL will not operate when the transmission is in
R (Reverse). AFL is not immediately operable after
starting the vehicle; driving a short distance is required
If the high-beam headlamps are turned on, the fog
lamps will also turn off. They will turn back on again
when you change back to low-beam headlamps.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Exterior Lighting Battery Saver
The exterior lamps turn off about 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF, if the parking lamps
or headlamps have been left on. This protects against
draining the battery. The battery saver does not work if
the headlamps are turned on after the ignition is turned
to LOCK/OFF.
Fog Lamps
Use the fog lamps for better vision in foggy or misty
conditions. The fog lamp control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
To keep the lamps on for more than 10 minutes, turn
the lamps back on with the exterior lamp control.
# (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp band on the lever
up to # and release it, to turn the fog lamps on or
off. The band will return to its original position.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Parade Dimming
This feature does not let the instrument panel
backlight dim during daylight hours while the key
is in the ignition and the headlamps are on. Parade
dimming automatically works with the light sensor,
located on top of the dashboard. If it is dark enough
outside and the parking lamps are on, the backlight
on the instrument panel can be adjusted by turning
the instrument panel brightness knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to brighten or dim the lighting.
The knob with this symbol
is located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering column.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to brighten
or dim the lights.
Reading Lamps
Turn the knob completely clockwise to turn on the
interior lamps.
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
These lamps come on automatically when any door is
opened.
Entry Lighting
The entry lighting system turns on the reading and dome
lamps and the backlighting to the exterior lamp control,
when a door is opened or if the transmitter unlock button
is pressed. If activated by the transmitter, the lighting
stays on for about 25 seconds. The entry lighting system
uses the light sensor on the instrument panel; so it must
be dark outside in order for the lamps to turn on. The
lamps turn off about 25 seconds after the last door is
closed. They dim then turn off if the ignition key is turned
to ON/RUN. They immediately turn off if the power locks
are used.
For manual operation, press the button next to each
lamp to turn it on or off.
If the reading lamps are left on, they automatically shut
off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned off.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands
of some accessories.
Electric Power Management
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage
is raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage
move up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem,
an alert will be displayed.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles.
This is because the generator (alternator) may not
be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the
power that is needed for very high electrical loads.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature helps to prevent battery drain if accessory
lamps are left on. If accessory lamps such as the
vanity mirror, cargo, reading, console, or glove box
are left on, they automatically time-out after about
20 minutes. To reset the battery protection, all of the
above lamps must be turned off or the ignition must
be in the ACC/ACCESSORY position.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on
accessory power outlets.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
auxiliary electrical equipment, such as a cellular
telephone.
There are three accessory power outlets. There is an
outlet located in the front storage area below the climate
control system, one inside the center console storage
bin, and one on the rear of the center console.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
To use an outlet, remove the protective cap. When not
in use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
The accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Notice: If electrical devices are left plugged into
a power outlet, the battery may drain causing the
vehicle not to start or damage to the battery. This
would not be covered by the warranty. Always unplug
all electrical devices when turning off the vehicle.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Analog Clock
The vehicle may have two removable ashtrays and
cigarette lighters. One ashtray can be placed into the
instrument panel storage compartment and the other
into the center console rear compartment. To use
the lighter, push it in all the way and let go. When
it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
The analog clock is located on the instrument panel
above the radio. The clock is not connected with
any other vehicle system and runs by itself.
To adjust the clock:
1. Locate the adjustment buttons directly below the
clock face.
To empty the ashtrays, hold on to the edges of the bin
and pull straight out. To reinstall, push the tray back
into place.
2. Push and hold the right adjustment button to move
the clock hands forward or the left adjustment button
to make the clock hands go backward. Holding either
button down will cause the clock to advance faster.
Release the button before the desired time is
reached.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold
a cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3. Push and release either button to adjust the time
by one minute increments until the desired time is
reached.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Operation
Climate Controls
AUTO (Automatic): The system automatically controls
fan speed, air delivery, and air conditioning in order to
heat or cool the vehicle to the desired temperature.
When the indicator light is on, the system is in full
automatic operation. If the air delivery mode or fan
setting is manually adjusted, the auto indicator turns
off and displays will show the selected settings.
Dual Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a comfortable setting
between 70°F (21°C) and 80°F (27°C).
Choosing the coldest or warmest temperature
setting will not cause the system to heat or cool
any faster. If the system is set at the warmest
temperature setting, it remains in manual mode
at that temperature and it will not go into
automatic mode.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather,
the system delays turning on the fan until
warm air is available. The system starts out
blowing air at the floor, but can automatically
change modes as the vehicle warms up to
maintain the chosen temperature setting.
A. Display
B. Fan Control
C. Power
H. Temperature Control
and Heated Seat
I. Air Conditioning
J. Recirculation/
Outside Air
D. AUTO
E. PASS (Passenger
Climate Control)
F. Defrost
K. Heated Windshield
Washer
G. Air Delivery Mode
Control
L. Rear Window
Defogger
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The length of time needed for warm up depends on
the outside temperature and the length of time that
has elapsed since the vehicle was last driven.
Manual Operation
O (Power): Press to turn the climate control system on
or off. When the climate control system is turned off
the air inlet defaults to outside air.
3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may take from
10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust the temperature, if
necessary.
D C (Fan Control): Press the buttons to increase or
decrease the fan speed. Pressing either button cancels
automatic operation and the system goes into manual
mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic operation.
The blower may reduce during an Onstar® session
to limit background noise.
English can be changed to metric units through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Q / R (Temperature Control): The temperature can
be adjusted separately for the driver and the passenger.
Press to increase or decrease the automatic temperature
settings.
If the airflow seems low when the fan speed is at
the highest setting, the passenger compartment air
filter might need to be replaced. For more information,
PASS (Passenger Climate Control): Press to set a
different temperature for the passenger. Then adjust
the passenger temperature buttons to a comfortable
setting.
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press the buttons to
change the direction of the airflow. The current mode
appears in the display screen. Changing the mode
cancels the automatic operation and the system goes
into manual mode. Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation.
Pressing the PASS button again automatically sets the
passenger’s temperature to the driver’s setting.
Turning the passenger’s temperature display off does
not shut the passenger’s climate control system off.
The outboard air outlets always receive some airflow in
every mode, except defrost.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
0 (Defrost): This mode clears the windshield of fog
or frost more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield,
with some air directed to the side windows. In this mode,
the system automatically turns off recirculation and
runs the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing.
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel outlets and the floor outlets. In automatic operation,
cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air
to the floor outlets.
This mode can also cause the fan speed and air
temperature to increase.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
system on or off and override the automatic system.
When in AUTO, the air conditioning compressor comes
on automatically, as needed.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some air directed to the windshield and outboard outlets.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor and side
window outlets. When this mode is selected, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is at or below
freezing. If recirculation is selected while in defog mode,
it is cancelled after 10 minutes.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M / F (Recirculation/Outside Air): Press this
button to switch between recirculation and outside
air modes. The indicator light comes on to show which
mode is being used. The recirculation mode recirculates
and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle.
It can be used to prevent outside air and odors from
entering the vehicle. Press the auto button to have
the system select the best air delivery mode for
the temperature setting.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog or frost from the rear window. It only works
when the ignition is in ON/RUN.
= (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger stays on for about
15 minutes, before turning off if the vehicle is moving
at a slower speed. At higher speeds, the rear window
defogger may stay on continuously. With each additional
press, the defogger runs for about 10 minutes. The
defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
Recirculation is not available in the defrost mode and
automatically turns off 10 minutes after defog is selected.
This helps to limit window fogging in the vehicle.
Using recirculation for long periods of time could cause
the air inside the vehicle to become too dry or stuffy.
To prevent this from happening, after the air in the vehicle
has cooled, select outside air or press the auto button.
The heated outside rearview mirrors turn on when the
rear window defogger button is on and helps to clear
fog or frost from the surface of the mirror. See Outside
The outside air mode pulls fresh air from outside the
vehicle. Outside air is always selected in defrost mode to
prevent fogging.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost or other material
from the inside of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or anything else that is
sharp. This may damage the rear window defogger
grid and affect your radio’s ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty.
Heated and Ventilated Seats: Press to heat or
ventilate the seat. See Heated and Ventilated Seats
on page 1-7.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The interior temperature
sensor located on the
instrument panel to
the right of the steering
wheel, measures the
temperature of the
_ (Heated Windshield Washer, If Equipped): For
Remote Start Climate Control Operation: For
vehicles with remote vehicle start feature and it is
activated, the climate control system heats and cools
the inside of the vehicle using the previous settings
of the system before the vehicle was turned off.
air inside the vehicle.
The windshield defroster and/or rear window defogger
turn on if it is cold outside. If the vehicle has heated seats,
they turn on if the temperature inside the vehicle is cooler
than 54°F (12.5°C) or if the outside temperature is cooler
than 48°F (9°C).
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to adjust the fan speed and the air
delivery, in order to maintain the selected temperature.
The system may also supply cooler air to the side of
the vehicle facing the sun. The recirculation mode
will also be activated, as necessary.
Sensors
The solar sensor located
on the instrument panel,
near the windshield,
Do not cover the sensors or the automatic climate
control system will not work properly.
monitors the solar heat.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of the instrument panel to direct the airflow. Use the
thumbwheels near the air outlets to open or close off
the airflow.
The passenger compartment air filter traps most of
the dust and pollen from the air entering the vehicle.
The filter will need to be changed periodically.
Using the climate control system without the passenger
air filter installed could let water or other debris enter
the system. This could cause a water leak or noises.
Make sure a new air filter is installed after removing
the old one.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from air inlets
at the base of the windshield that could block the
flow of air into the vehicle.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of the vehicle more
effectively.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
equipment to the outside of the vehicle.
The passenger compartment air filter is located
under the hood below the windshield wiper arm and
the screen on the passenger side of the vehicle.
for more information on location.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the passenger compartment air filter:
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn the ignition
off again when the wipers are straight up on the
windshield.
This allows access to the leaf screen.
The passenger compartment air filter is
located under the screen.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is
started to indicate they are working.
3. Open the hood to access the engine compartment.
information.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
4. Remove the three screws that hold the screen in
place and lift off the screen by lifting and sliding it
toward the center of the vehicle.
5. Pull out on the two tabs located on each end of the
filter cover.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to
do repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
6. Lift the filter cover off by pulling it straight up.
7. Remove the old filter and insert a new one.
for the correct part number for the filter.
8. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the cover.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to indicate how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is
going, how much fuel the vehicle has used and many of the other things needed to drive safely and economically.
United States Automatic Transmission Cluster shown, Manual and Canada similar
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
United States V–Series Automatic Transmission Cluster shown, Manual and Canada similar
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in either
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
If the vehicle has to have a new odometer installed,
the new one may read the correct mileage. This is
because the vehicle computer has stored the mileage
in memory.
While the Driver Shift Control (DSC) feature is active,
the odometer changes to show the gear range.
for more information.
United States and
Canada Automatic,
V-Series Similar
Trip Odometers
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The trip odometer can record the number of miles or
kilometers traveled for up to two trips.
Notice: If the engine is operated with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, the vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
The trip odometer is part of the Driver Information
Center (DIC), for more information see DIC Operation
For vehicles that have the navigation system, see your
Navigation System manual for more information.
The CTS-V tachometer has tracer lights that follow the
movement of the tachometer indicator.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the CTS-V, the tracer lights also flash when
it is time to up-shift to avoid the engine speed limit.
more information.
The safety belt light
comes on and stays on
for several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
Engine Speed Limiter
This feature prevents the engine speed from reaching
an unsafe level. If the level is too high, the throttle closes
or limits the fuel supply until the engine speed returns
to a safe level. Throttle operation and fuel supply returns
to normal when engine speed is lowered.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
For the CTS-V, the tachometer tracer lights flashes prior
to reaching engine speed limit. The tracer lights also
flash on automatic transmission vehicles while in
the DSC or Tap Shift modes.
Several seconds after the engine is started, a
chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs
if the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
The passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
Safety Belt Reminders
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is started.
If the light does not come
on then, have it fixed
immediately.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
{ CAUTION:
The front passenger safety belt warning light and
chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
Airbag Readiness Light
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check includes
the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the airbag system, see Airbag
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
important safety information. The instrument panel
has a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the passenger
sensing system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
United States
Canada
{ CAUTION:
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you
are using remote start to start the vehicle from a
distance, if equipped, you may not see the system
check. Then, after several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol, to let you know the status of the right
front passenger frontal airbag.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Up-Shift Light
This light comes on briefly
The vehicle may have
an up-shift light, it shows
when to shift to the
next higher gear for
best fuel economy.
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
more information.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system message
in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear.
more information. This light could indicate that there
are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there
is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away.
If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with the
light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
For the CTS-V, the tracer lights function as a
performance up-shift light.
These tracers flash to indicate when to shift to the
next higher gear to avoid the engine speed limit.
for more information.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light stays on after the parking brake is fully
released there is a base brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
This vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part
can still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking
both parts need to be working well.
For vehicles with the Electric Park Brake (EPB), if the
light continues flashing after the brake is released,
or while driving, there is a problem with the Electric
Parking Brake system.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have the brake system inspected right away.
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road
and stop carefully. The pedal may be harder to push,
or the pedal may go closer to the floor. The vehicle may
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle
page 4-26.
{ CAUTION:
United States
Canada
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when the ignition is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when the parking brake is set.
The light will flash or stay on if the parking brake is not
fully released.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
For vehicles with the Electric Park Brake (EPB), this
light should come on briefly when ignition is turned
to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn if there is a problem.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If this light comes on there is a problem with a system
on the vehicle that is causing the park brake system
to work at a reduced level. The vehicle can still be
driven, but should be taken to a dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the
light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or
comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service.
If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the
vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on, the vehicle
does not have antilock brakes and there is a problem with
page 3-38.
information.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
brake related DIC messages.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak®/Traction Control
System (TCS) Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
The Traction Control
The engine coolant
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak
warning light should
come on briefly when
the engine is started.
temperature warning light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally
the indicator light then goes off.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on or stays on while driving, there
may be a problem with the TCS/StabiliTrak and the
vehicle may need service. When this warning light is on,
the system does not limit wheel spin. Adjust driving
accordingly.
If the light comes on and stays on while driving, the
vehicle may have a problem with the cooling system.
Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as
possible to avoid damage to the engine. A warning
chime sounds when this light is on.
information.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure monitoring
system, this light comes
on briefly when the engine
is started.
It provides information about tire pressures and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
United States
Canada
When the Light is On Steady
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the engine coolant overheats the engine coolant
temperature warning light will come on. See Engine
information.
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as
it is safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate
more information.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with every ignition
for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle.
This system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with
this light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to
costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty.
This could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not
come on, have the vehicle
serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could
damage the emission control system on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
The following can prevent more serious damage to the
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and may cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to
fix any mechanical or electrical problems that might
have developed.
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection. This
can happen if the battery has recently been replaced
or if the battery has run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical emission control
systems during normal driving. This can take several
days of routine driving. If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the inspection for lack of
OBD II system readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in the ON/RUN and the light is not on.
For vehicles with a Keyless Access ignition,
make sure the transmitter is in the passenger
compartment. See Ignition Positions (Key Access)
on page 2-33.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Oil Pressure Light
{ CAUTION:
For vehicles with an oil
pressure light, if there
is a problem with the oil, the
light may stay on after the
engine is started, or comes
on while driving.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
This light indicates that oil is not going through the
engine quickly enough to keep it lubricated. The engine
could be low on oil or could have some other oil problem.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
The oil light could also come on in the following
situations:
• The light comes on briefly when the ignition is
turned on to show that it is working properly.
If it does not come on with the ignition on, there
may be a problem with the fuse or bulb. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
• Sometimes when the engine is idling at a stop, a
chime sounds and the light may blink on and off.
This is normal.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A reading outside the normal operating range may be
caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other
problem causing low oil pressure. Oil should be checked
as soon as possible. See Oil pressure Low Stop Engine
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
The engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
United States
Canada
For vehicles with an engine oil pressure gage. It shows
the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch)
when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate
pressure in kPa (kilopascals).
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
can damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but if readings are outside
the normal operating range, the oil pressure light will
information.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Lights On Reminder
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-27.
This light comes on
whenever the parking
lamps are on.
information.
Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
Highbeam On Light
If the fuel supply gets low, the Fuel Level Low message
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
and a single chime will sound. See DIC Warnings
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
Here are a few concerns some owners have had about
the fuel gage. All of these situations are normal and
do not indicate that anything is wrong with the fuel gage:
• At the gas station the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
for more information.
• The gage may change when you turn, stop quickly
or accelerate quickly.
Fuel Gage
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill the tank than
the gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated that the tank was half full, but
it actually took a little more or less than half the
tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
The fuel gage shows
approximately how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
It works only when
the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Boost Gage
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) gives you the
status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is also
used to display warning/status messages. All messages
appear in the DIC display located at the bottom of the
instrument panel cluster. The DIC buttons are located
on the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC displays the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
The top line of the DIC display shows the DIC
information. The bottom line of the DIC display shows
the compass. The compass displays in the trip/fuel
menus and in some vehicle information menus.
United States
Canada
For the CTS-V, this gage is located in the instrument
panel cluster.
If a problem is detected, a warning message appears
on the display. Take any message that appears on
the display seriously and remember that clearing
the message only makes the message disappear,
and does not correct the problem.
This gage indicates positive manifold pressure which is
the induction air pressure level in the intake manifold
before it enters the combustion chamber. This gage
reads zero under light throttle before boost is generated.
This gage automatically resets to zero every time the
engine is started.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V Set/Reset: Press this button to reset certain DIC
features and to acknowledge DIC warning messages
and clear them from the DIC display.
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information
Center (DIC) has different
displays which can be
accessed by pressing the
DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel, next
to the steering wheel.
y z Menu Up/Down: Press this button to scroll up
and down the menu items.
Trip/Fuel Display Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): The following display menu items can
be displayed by pressing the trip/fuel button:
Odometer
This display shows the distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
3 Trip/Fuel: Press this button to scroll through the
trip and fuel displays. See “Trip/Fuel Display Menu
Items” following for more information on these displays.
Trip A or Trip B
These displays show the current distance traveled since
the last reset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used at the
same time. Each trip odometer can be reset to zero
separately by pressing and holding the set/reset button
for a few seconds while the desired trip odometer is
displayed.
T Vehicle Information: Press this button to scroll
through the vehicle information displays. See “Vehicle
Information Display Menu Items” following for more
information on these displays.
U Customization: Press this button to scroll through
each of the customization features. See DIC Vehicle
the customization features.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Range
Timer
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) you can drive
without refilling the fuel tank. This estimate is based on
the current driving conditions and changes if the driving
conditions change. For example, if you are driving in
traffic and making frequent stops, the display may read
one number, but if you enter the freeway, the number
may change even though you still have the same amount
of fuel in the fuel tank. This is because different driving
conditions produce different fuel economies. Generally,
freeway driving produces better fuel economy than city
driving.
This display can be used like a stopwatch. You can
record the time it takes to travel from one point to
another. To access the timer, press the trip/fuel
button until Timer 00:00:00 displays.
To turn on the timer, press the set/reset button until the
timer starts.
To turn off the timer, press the set/reset button again.
The timer stops and displays the end timing value.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button after the timer has been stopped.
Inst (Instantaneous) Economy
Once the range drops below about 30 miles (48 km)
remaining, the display shows Low Range.
This display shows the current fuel economy in either
miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km). This number reflects only the fuel economy
that the vehicle has right now and changes frequently
as driving conditions change. Unlike average economy,
this display cannot be reset.
If the vehicle is low on fuel, the Fuel Level Low message
displays. See “Fuel Level Low” under DIC Warnings
AVG (Average) Economy
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this display
was reset. To reset this display to zero, press the
set/reset button.
AVG (Average) Speed
This display shows the average speed of the vehicle in
either miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).
This average is calculated based on the various vehicle
speeds recorded since the last reset of this display.
To reset this display to zero, press the set/reset button.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Oil Life must be reset after each oil change. It does
not reset itself. Avoid accidental resetting of the Oil Life
system. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system, See Engine
when the system is reset.
Speedometer
This display shows a digital speedometer in the DIC.
The speed displays in either miles per hour (mph)
or kilometers per hour (km/h). To change the units
from English to metric, see “Units” later in this section.
Blank Display
Units
This display shows no information.
This display allows you to select between English or
Metric units of measurement. Once in this display,
press the set/reset button to select between English
or Metric units.
Vehicle Information Display Menu
Items
Parking Assist
T (Vehicle Information): The following display
menu items can be displayed by pressing the vehicle
information button:
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this display allows the system to
be turned on or off. Once in this display, press the
set/reset button to select between On or Off. The URPA
system automatically turns back on after each vehicle
start. When the URPA system is turned off and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park), the DIC displays the
Parking Assist Off message as a reminder that the
system has been turned off. See DIC Warnings
information.
Oil Life Remaining
If the vehicle has this display, it shows the estimated oil
life remaining. If you see 99% Oil Life Remaining on
the display, that means that 99% of the current oil life
remains.
When the oil life is depleted, the Change Engine Oil
Soon message appears on the display. You should
change the oil as soon as possible. In addition to the
engine oil life system monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled Maintenance
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure
Calibrate Compass
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure is shown in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press the
vehicle information button until the DIC displays
Front Tire PSI (kPa) Left ## Right ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
Rear Tire PSI (kPa) Left ## Right ##.
The vehicle may have this feature. The compass can be
manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass through
Change Compass Zone
The vehicle may have this feature. To change the
compass zone through the DIC, see DIC Compass
on page 3-55.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by
the system while driving, a message advising you
to check the pressure in a specific tire appears in the
information.
Relearn Remote Key
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, this display allows you to match the transmitter
to the vehicle. This procedure will erase all previously
learned transmitters. Therefore, they must be relearned
as additional transmitters.
Battery Voltage
This display shows the current battery voltage.
The vehicle’s charging system regulates voltage
based on the state of the battery. The battery voltage
may fluctuate when viewing this information on the DIC.
This is normal.
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, see
instructions on matching a keyless access transmitter
to the vehicle.
If there is a problem with the battery charging system,
the charging system light illuminates and/or the DIC
displays a message. See Charging System Light
page 3-21 for more information.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To match an RKE transmitter to the vehicle:
Trans (Transmission) Temp (Temperature)
(CTS-V Only)
1. Press the vehicle information button until
Press V To Relearn Remote Key displays.
This display shows the transmission fluid temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
2. Press the set/reset button until Remote Key
Learning Active is displayed.
Oil Pressure (CTS-V Only)
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
This display shows the oil pressure in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
Coolant Temp (Temperature) (CTS-V Only)
This display shows the engine coolant temperature in
either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
A chime sounds indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
Lateral Acceleration (CTS-V Only)
4. To learn additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Lateral acceleration is a measure of how hard you
are taking a corner. For example, when you are turning
right you will feel your body push to the left. This force
is measured in a “g”. This gage will display from
0.0 g to 2.0 g.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight learned
transmitters.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Compass
The vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight. If you do not live in zone
eight or drive out of the area, the variance needs to
be changed to the appropriate zone.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle
is moving. On an automatic transmission vehicle,
only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
On a manual transmission vehicle, only set it
when the vehicle is stopped.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Press the vehicle information button until
Press V To Change Compass Zone displays.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
5. Calibrate the compass. See “Compass Calibration
Procedure” following.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, check that the
compass is set to the correct variance zone.
See “Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure”
earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
If CAL appears in the DIC display, the compass should
be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Interference may be caused
by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic note pad holder,
or any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the
magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the
compass.
2. Press the vehicle information button until
Press V To Calibrate Compass displays.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display Calibrating Drive In Circles.
Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less than
5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration. The DIC
will display Calibration Complete for a few seconds
when the calibration is complete. The DIC display
will then return to Press V To Calibrate Compass.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AFL (Adaptive Forward Lighting)
Lamps Need Service
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver to correct
the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
This message displays when the Adaptive Forward
Lighting (AFL) system is disabled and needs service.
See your dealer/retailer. See Adaptive Forward Lighting
Some messages may not require immediate action,
All Wheel Drive Off
but you can press V (Set/Reset) to acknowledge that
you received the messages and to clear them from
the display.
If the vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system,
this message displays when there is a temporary
condition making the AWD system unavailable.
The vehicle will run in 2WD. This could be caused by:
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
• Loss of wheel or vehicle speed
• AWD system overheat
• Certain vehicle electrical conditions
This message turns off when the above conditions
are no longer present and by resetting the warning
message.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
Accessory Mode Active
To reset the warning message, turn the ignition off
and then back on again after 30 seconds. If the
message stays on, see your dealer/retailer right away.
more information.
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when the accessory mode is active.
for more information.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Light Control Off
Battery Volts Low
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned off.
This message displays when the electrical system is
charging less than 10 volts or the battery has been
drained.
Automatic Light Control On
If this message appears immediately after starting the
engine, it is possible that the generator can still recharge
the battery. The battery should recharge while driving,
but may take a few hours to do so. Consider using
an auxiliary charger to boost the battery after returning
home or to a final destination. Make sure you follow
the manufacturer’s instructions.
This message displays when the automatic headlamps
are turned on.
Battery Saver Active
This message displays when the system detects that the
battery voltage is dropping below expected levels. The
battery saver system starts reducing certain features of
the vehicle that you may be able to notice. At the point
that the features are disabled, this message is displayed.
It means that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in
the battery.
If this message appears while driving or after starting
the vehicle and stays on, have it checked immediately
to determine the cause of this problem.
To help the generator recharge the battery quickly,
you can reduce the load on the electrical system
by turning off the accessories.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the battery
to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the vehicle information button until Battery Voltage is
displayed.
The normal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.
You can monitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing
the vehicle information button until Battery Voltage is
displayed.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calibrating Drive In Circles
Check Tire Pressure
This message displays when calibrating the compass.
Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h)
page 3-55 for more information.
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. It also
displays Left Front, Right Front, Left Rear, or Right
Rear to indicate which tire. More than one tire pressure
message can be received at a time. To read the other
messages, press the set/reset button. If a tire pressure
message appears, stop as soon as you can. Have the
tire pressures checked and set to those shown on the
page 3-50. If the tire pressure is low, the low tire pressure
page 3-41.
Calibration Complete
This message displays when the compass calibration is
information.
Change Engine Oil Soon
When this message displays, it means that service
is required for the vehicle. See your dealer/retailer.
Cruise Set To XXX MPH (km/h)
When you reset the Change Engine Oil Soon message
by clearing it from the display, you still must reset
the engine oil life system separately. For more
information on resetting the engine oil life system,
This message displays whenever the cruise control
information.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Differential Hot, Reduce Speed
(CTS-V Only)
Electronic Key Not Detected
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays if the vehicle does not detect the
presence of a transmitter when you have attempted
to start the vehicle or a vehicle door has just closed.
The following conditions may cause this message
to appear:
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
differential fluid temperature exceeds 300°F (150°C).
Driving aggressively or at high speeds can cause
the differential fluid temperature to be higher than
normal. If this message appears, you may continue
to drive at a slower speed. If you have been operating
the vehicle under normal driving conditions, the
vehicle may need service. See your dealer/retailer
for an inspection.
• Driver-added equipment plugged into the accessory
power outlet on the center console is causing
interference. Examples of these devices are cell
phones and cell phone chargers, two-way radios,
power inverters, or similar items. Try moving the
keyless access transmitter away from these devices
when starting the vehicle. In addition, PDA devices
and remote garage and gate openers may also
generate Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) that
may interfere with the keyless access transmitter.
Do not carry the keyless access transmitter in the
same pocket or bag as these devices.
To acknowledge the message, press V . The message
reappears and a chime sounds every two minutes
until this condition changes. If you do not clear
the message, it will remain on until the condition
changes.
Driver Door Open
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed completely. Close the door completely.
• The vehicle is experiencing Electromagnetic
Interference (EMI). Some locations, such as airports,
automatic toll booths, and some gas stations have
EMI fields which may interfere with the keyless
access transmitter.
Electronic Key Already Known
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays if you try to match a transmitter
that has already been learned. See Keyless Access
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electronic Key Not Detected Restart
Allowed
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when the keyless access transmitter
is not detected inside the vehicle while you are trying to
turn the ignition off. The vehicle may be near a strong
radio antenna signal causing the keyless access system
to be jammed. If you have the keyless access transmitter
with you, get out of the vehicle and lock the doors. If you
do not have the keyless access transmitter with you, you
will be able to start the vehicle again within five minutes,
or until the vehicle’s content theft deterrent system is
information.
If moving the transmitter to different locations within
the vehicle does not help, place the transmitter in the
center console transmitter pocket with the buttons facing
the front of the vehicle and then start the vehicle.
Engine Hot A/C (Air Conditioning) Off
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the air conditioning compressor turns back on.
You can continue to drive the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s battery voltage is low. The battery
voltage must be above 10 volts for the keyless
access transmitter to be detected properly.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil Low Add Oil
Engine Power Is Reduced
If the vehicle has an oil level sensor, this message
displays if the oil level in the vehicle is low. Check the
oil level and correct it as necessary. You may need to let
the vehicle cool or warm up and cycle the ignition to
be sure this message clears.
This message displays when the engine power is
being reduced to protect the engine from damage.
There could be several malfunctions that might cause this
message. Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’s
ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed to your destination.
The performance may be reduced the next time the
vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but acceleration and
speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays on,
the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
This message clears itself after 10 seconds, until the
for additional information.
Engine Overheated Idle Engine
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-38 for more information.
Fuel Level Low
This message displays when the vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. A chime may
sound when this message displays. See Filling the Tank
on page 5-9.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
Heated Washer Fluid Wash (Washer)
Wipes Pending
If the vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when you turn on the heated windshield washer
fluid system. See “Heated Windshield Washer” under
page 5-41 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Washer Fluid System Off
Left Rear Door Open
This message displays when the driver side rear door
is not closed completely. Make sure that the door
is closed completely.
If the vehicle has this feature, this message displays
when you manually turn off the heated windshield
washer fluid system or when the system automatically
turns off. See “Heated Windshield Washer” under
This message clears itself after 10 seconds.
Maximum # Electronic Keys Learned
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when the maximum number of
transmitters have been learned. See Keyless Access
Hood Open
This message displays when the hood is not closed
completely. Make sure that the hood is closed
completely.
Oil Pressure Low Stop Engine
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the
vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle
until the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
Ice Possible Drive With Care
This message displays when the outside temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
Learn Delay Active Wait
XX Min (Minutes)
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light may also
appear on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil
page 5-18 for more information.
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when matching new transmitters to
the vehicle. See Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-9 for more information.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible when this message is displayed.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park Brake Released
Press Brake Pedal to Release Park
Brake
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this
message displays when the parking brake has been
released from the set position. See Electric Parking
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this
message displays if you try to release the park
brake system without first pressing the brake pedal.
information.
Park Brake Set
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this
message displays when the parking brake has been
applied to the set position. See Electric Parking Brake
on page 2-45 for more information.
Press Brake To Start Engine
(Automatic Transmission Only)
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays if you try to start the engine without
having the brake pressed. The brake needs to be
pressed when starting the engine. See Ignition Positions
Parking Assist Off
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has been
started, this message displays to remind the driver
that the URPA system has been turned off. Press the
set/reset button to acknowledge this message and clear
it from the DIC display. To turn the URPA system
back on, see “Parking Assist” under DIC Operation and
Press Start Control To Learn Keys
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when matching new transmitters to
the vehicle. See Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-9 for more information.
Passenger Door Open
This message displays when the passenger side front
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rainsense Wipers Active
Replace Battery In Remote Key
If the vehicle has this feature, this message
displays while the Rainsense™ wipers are active.
information.
This message displays when the battery in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access transmitter needs
to be replaced. To replace the battery, see “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Ready To Learn Electronic Key # X
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays while matching new transmitters to
the vehicle. See Keyless Access System Operation
on page 2-9 for more information.
Right Rear Door Open
This message displays when the passenger side rear
door is not closed completely. Make sure that the door is
closed completely.
Release Park Brake Switch
Rotate Control To Off Position
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this
message displays if the Park Brake switch is pulled
while the vehicle is moving. See Electric Parking Brake
on page 2-45 for more information.
If the vehicle has the keyless access system,
this message displays when the ignition is in ACC/
ACCESSORY and the shift lever has just been moved
to P (Park). The message displays as a reminder to turn
the ignition off. To avoid draining the battery, make sure
the ignition is turned off before leaving the vehicle.
Remote Key Learning Active
If the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, this message displays while matching new
transmitters to the vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s)
to Your Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Service Air Bag
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-35 for more information.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service A/C System
Service Battery Charging System
This message displays when the electronic sensors that
control the air conditioning and heating systems are
no longer working. Have the climate control system
serviced by your dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in
heating and air conditioning efficiency.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging systems. Driving with this
problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary
accessories. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so. Have the electrical system checked by your
dealer/retailer. Under certain conditions, the charging
system light may also turn on in the instrument panel
more information.
Service All Wheel Drive
This message displays if a problem occurs with the
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system. The vehicle will run in
2WD. This could be caused by:
Service Brake Assist
• An electronics problem
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. The brake system warning light and the
antilock brake system (ABS) warning light may also
display on the instrument panel cluster. See Brake
information. Stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message displays immediately
or again after you begin driving, the brake system
needs service. See your dealer/retailer as soon as
• An AWD system oil overheat
• Worn out or overheated clutch plates
• Various electrical issues
If this message appears, stop as soon as possible
and turn off the ignition for 30 seconds. Restart
the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC
display. If the message is still displayed or appears
again when you begin driving, the system needs service.
See your dealer/retailer right away.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Brake System
Service Power Steering
This message displays, while the ignition is on, when
the brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light on the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
information. Have the brake system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
This message displays if a problem is detected with
the speed variable assist steering system. When this
message is displayed, you may notice that the effort
required to steer the vehicle increases or feels heavier,
but you will still be able to steer the vehicle. See Steering
on page 4-10.
Service Keyless Start System
Service Stabilitrak
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays when there is a problem with this
feature. See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the StabiliTrak® system. The TCS/
StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument panel
cluster also comes on.
Service Park Brake
If this message comes on while you are driving,
pull off the road as soon as possible and stop carefully.
Try resetting the system by turning the ignition off then
back on. If this message still stays on or comes back on
again while you are driving, the vehicle needs service.
Have the StabiliTrak system inspected by your dealer/
on page 4-6 for more information.
For vehicles with the Electric Parking Brake, this
message displays if a problem is detected with the
electric parking brake system. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Service Parking Assist
If the vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is
a problem with the URPA system. See Ultrasonic
information. See your dealer/retailer for service.
Service Suspension System
This message displays when there is a problem with
the Magnetic Ride Control system. See Magnetic Ride
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Theft Deterrent System
Service Traction Control
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system programmed in the key. A fault
has been detected in the system which means that the
system is disabled and it is not protecting the vehicle.
The vehicle usually restarts; however, you may want to
take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off
page 2-30 for more information.
This message displays when there is a problem with
the Traction Control System (TCS). The TCS/StabiliTrak
warning light on the instrument panel cluster also comes
on. When this message displays, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly. See your
dealer/retailer for service. See Traction Control
Service Transmission
This message displays when there is a problem with the
vehicle’s transmission. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
Service Tire Monitor System
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-41. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-76 for more information. If the warning comes
on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
Service Vehicle Soon
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shift To Park (Automatic
Transmission Only)
Stabilitrak Competitive Mode
This message displays when the Competitive Driving
mode is selected. When in this mode, the Traction
Control System (TCS) will not be operating and
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will turn on. Adjust
your driving accordingly. See “Competitive Driving
page 4-7 for more information.
If the vehicle has the keyless access system, this
message displays if the vehicle is not in P (Park)
while the engine is being turned off. The vehicle will
be in ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the shift lever is moved
to P (Park), the ignition needs to be turned off. If the
ignition is not turned off, the vehicle will remain in
ACC/ACCESSORY. To avoid draining the battery,
turn the ignition to off before leaving the vehicle.
Stabilitrak Not Ready
This message may display after first driving the vehicle
and exceeding 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30 seconds.
The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument
panel cluster also comes on. The StabiliTrak system
is not functional until the message has turned off. See
Speed Limited To XXX MPH (km/h)
This message displays when the vehicle speed is limited
to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle detects a
problem in the speed variable assist steering, magnetic
ride control, or automatic leveling control systems.
Have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
Sport Mode
This message displays when the vehicle is in sport
mode. See “Driver Shift Control (DSC)” under Automatic
information.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stabilitrak Off
Start Aborted By Theft Deterrent
This message displays when you turn off StabiliTrak,
or when the stability control has been automatically
disabled. The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light on
the instrument panel cluster also comes on.
This message displays if there is a communication
problem between the keyless access system and
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be started when this
message displays. See your dealer/retailer for service.
To realize the full benefits of the stability enhancement
system, you should normally leave StabiliTrak on.
Suspension Mode Sport
(CTS-V Only)
This message will be displayed when sport mode is
selected using the Magnetic Ride Control button in the
center of the instrument panel. See Magnetic Ride
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
Suspension Mode Tour (CTS-V Only)
This message will be displayed when touring mode
is selected using the Magnetic Ride Control button in
the center of the instrument panel. See Magnetic
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
Theft Attempted
This message displays if the theft-deterrent system
has detected a break-in attempt while you were away
page 2-27 for more information.
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tighten Gas Cap
Turn Signal On
This message displays when the fuel cap has not been
fully tightened. Recheck the fuel cap to ensure that it
is on and tightened properly.
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the
turn signal if you drive the vehicle for more than about
1 mile (1.6 km) with a turn signal on. A multiple
chime sounds when this message displays.
Tire Learning Active
Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on
the vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
This message displays when the vehicle is low on
windshield washer fluid. Refill the windshield washer
fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Windshield
DIC Vehicle Customization
Vehicle customization allows certain features to be
programmed for one preferred setting.
Transmission Hot Idle Engine
This message displays when the transmission fluid in
the vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle and allow it to idle
until the transmission cools down or until this message
is removed.
Only the customization options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
The default settings were preset when the vehicle left
the factory, but may have been changed.
Trunk Open
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
This message displays when the trunk is not closed
completely. Make sure that the trunk is closed
completely.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Language
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
1. Turn the ignition on.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
Press the customization button until the Display
Language screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
2. Press the customization button to enter the feature
settings menu.
Feature Settings Menu Items
English (default): All messages will appear in English.
Deutsch: All messages will appear in German.
Italiano: All messages will appear in Italian.
Francais: All messages will appear in French.
Espanol: All messages will appear in Spanish.
Portugese: All messages will appear in Portugese.
Arabic: All messages will appear in Arabic.
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
Display In English
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows for changing
the language of the DIC messages back to English.
Press the customization button until the
Press V To Display In English screen appears
on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to select English as the language in which
all DIC messages will appear.
Chinese: All messages will appear in Chinese.
Japanese: All messages will appear in Japanese.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
door(s) will automatically unlock. It also allows you to
select which doors and when they will automatically
page 2-18 for more information.
Press the customization button until Auto Door Lock
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until Auto Door Unlock
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then press
the menu up/down button to scroll through the following
settings:
Shift Out Of Park (default on Automatic
Transmission) (Automatic Transmission Only):
The vehicle’s doors automatically lock when the doors
are closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park).
Off: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
Driver Only At Off: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the ignition is turned off.
At Vehicle Speed (default on Manual Transmission):
The vehicle’s doors automatically lock when the vehicle
speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h) for three seconds.
All At Off (default on Manual Transmission): All of
the doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.
All In Park (default on Automatic Transmission)
(Automatic Transmission Only): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lights Only: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the transmitter.
Remote Door Lock Feedback
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access transmitter,
or when the vehicle is automatically locked using the
Keyless Locking feature. You will not receive feedback
when locking the vehicle with the transmitter if the doors
are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
in this section for more information.
Horn Only: The horn will sound on the second press of
the lock button on the transmitter.
Horn & Lights (default): The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the lock button on the transmitter, and
the horn will sound when the lock button is pressed again
within five seconds of the previous command.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Press the customization button until Remote Door
Lock appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
Off: There will be no feedback when you press the lock
button on the transmitter.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Door Unlock Feedback
Exit Lighting
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access
transmitter, or when the vehicle is automatically
unlocked using the Keyless Unlock feature. You will not
receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
Unlock” later in this section for more information.
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
Press the customization button until Exit Lighting
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Off: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
Press the customization button until Remote Door
Unlock appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
10 Seconds (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 10 seconds.
30 Seconds: The exterior lamps will stay on for
30 seconds.
Lights Off: The exterior lamps will not flash when you
press the unlock button on the transmitter.
2 Minutes: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
Lights On (default): The exterior lamps will flash when
you press the unlock button on the transmitter.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Approach Lighting
Factory Settings
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) or keyless access transmitter.
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
Press the customization button until Factory Settings
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until Approach Lighting
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Restore All (default): The customization features will
be set to their factory default settings.
Off: The exterior lights will not turn on when you unlock
the vehicle with the transmitter.
No Change: The customization features will not be set
to their factory default settings.
On (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the transmitter.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the transmitter is pressed, or the vehicle is
no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select whether the horn sounds or the lights flash
when the vehicle is locked, see “Remote Door
Lock” earlier in this section.
Keyless Locking
If the vehicle has the keyless access system,
this feature allows you to select whether the doors
automatically lock during normal vehicle exit. When
the ignition is turned off and all doors become closed,
the vehicle will determine how many keyless access
transmitters remain in the vehicle interior. If at least
one keyless access transmitter has been removed
from the interior of the vehicle, the doors will lock after
several seconds.
Press the customization button until Keyless Locking
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Off (default): The keyless locking feature will be
disabled.
For example, if there are two keyless access
On: The keyless locking feature will be enabled.
transmitters in the vehicle and one is removed, the
other will be locked in. The keyless access transmitter
locked in the vehicle can still be used to start the vehicle
or unlock the doors, if needed. A person approaching
the outside of the locked vehicle without an authorized
keyless access transmitter, however, will not be able
to open the door, even with a transmitter in the vehicle.
for more information.
The doors will automatically lock several seconds
after you turn the ignition off, remove a keyless access
transmitter from the interior of the vehicle, and close all
of the doors.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
You may temporarily disable the keyless locking feature
by pressing the door unlock switch for three seconds
on an open door. Keyless locking will then remain
disabled until a door lock switch is pressed or until
the power mode transitions from the off power mode.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keyless Unlock
Chime Volume
If the vehicle has the keyless access system,
this feature allows you to select which doors will
automatically unlock when you approach the vehicle
with the keyless access transmitter and open the driver’s
page 2-9 for more information.
This feature allows you to select the volume level of
the chime.
Press the customization button until Chime Volume
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
To select whether the lights flash when the vehicle is
unlocked, see “Remote Door Unlock” earlier in this
section.
Normal: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
Press the customization button until Keyless Unlock
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll
through the following settings:
Loud: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
Entry Door Only (default): Only the driver’s door will
automatically unlock when you approach the vehicle with
the keyless access transmitter and open the driver’s
door. The rest of the doors will unlock if the driver’s
door handle is pulled a second time.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
All Doors: All doors will automatically unlock when you
approach the vehicle with the keyless access transmitter
and open the driver’s door.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
open the driver door, the seat and steering column will
stay in the original exit position, unless a memory recall
took place prior to opening the driver door again.
Easy Exit Recall
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
page 1-8 for more information.
Automatic On (Key Access default): If the features
are enabled though the Easy Exit Setup menu, the
driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle has the
power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature, the
power steering column will move up and forward when
the key is removed from the ignition or after pressing
the easy exit seat button. The automatic easy exit seat
movement will only occur one time after the key is
removed from the ignition. If the automatic movement
has already occurred, and you put the key back in
the ignition and remove it again, the seat and steering
column will stay in the original exit position, unless
a memory recall took place prior to removing the key
again.
Press the customization button until Easy Exit Recall
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
Automatic Off: No automatic seat exit recall will occur.
The recall will only occur after pressing the easy exit
seat button.
Automatic On (Keyless Access default): If the
features are enabled though the Easy Exit Setup menu,
the driver’s seat will move back, and if the vehicle
has the power tilt wheel and telescopic steering feature,
the power steering column will move up and forward
when the vehicle is parked and the driver door is
opened, or after pressing the easy exit seat button.
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the driver door is opened. If the automatic
movement has already occurred, and you close and then
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Easy Exit Setup
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
If the vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit
seat feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic
easy exit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors and
earlier for more information.
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
Press the customization button until Easy Exit Setup
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the menu up/down button to scroll through
the following settings:
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
Off: No automatic seat exit will recall.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
Tilt/Telescope: The steering wheel tilt and steering
column telescope features will recall.
All (default): The driver’s seat and the steering wheel
tilt and steering column telescope features will recall,
if the vehicle has this option.
{ CAUTION:
No Change: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
Radio(s)
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
page 4-2.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
Full View of Radio with CD shown,
Radio with Six-Disc CD similar
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP).
With RAP, the audio system can be played even after
the ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB utilizes
Gracenote® technology to provide Song, Artist, Album,
and Genre information for many CD audio discs
and is capable of playing DVD-A and DTS encoded
discs, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Partial View of Radio with DVD Audio,
Hard Drive Device (HDD), and USB
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS)
feature. RDS is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available. While the
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio station can
broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.
The vehicle may have one of these radios as its audio
system.
If the vehicle does not have one of these radio
systems, it may have a navigation radio system.
See the Navigation System manual for more information
on the navigation audio system.
If the vehicle has one of these radios, it has either a
Bose® sound system or a Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround®
sound system. See “Digital Signal Processing (DSP)”
later in this section for more information on the
Bose® 5.1 Cabin Surround® sound system.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Noise Compensation Technology: If the vehicle has
the Radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB, it includes
Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation technology.
When turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts
the audio system equalization, to compensate for
background noise.
Playing the Radio
VOL P (Volume/Power): The power knob is part of the
VOL knob and is located above the radio, at the left side
of the clock. Press to turn the system on and off.
Turn the VOL knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
This feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well
you hear the music being played through the vehicle’s
audio system. At higher volume settings, where the
music is much louder than the background noise,
there might be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®.
For additional information on AudioPilot®, visit
bose.com/audiopilot.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): A Radio with
SCV automatically adjusts the sound to compensate
for road and wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume is consistent while
driving. That way, the volume level should sound about
the same while driving. To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
To activate AudioPilot®:
2. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio
setup menu.
1. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOL
(automatic volume) label on the radio display.
2. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOL label
on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
allows for more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
3. Press either the On or Off label located under the
AUTO VOL display to turn this feature on or off.
The display times out after approximately
10 seconds.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For XM™ stations, the music guide displays a Category
list. This list displays all of the Categories available and
the number of XM stations available under each.
Finding a Station
TUNE/TONE: Turn to select different radio stations
within a selected band.
Turn the MENU/SELECT knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to scroll through the list. Press this
knob to select the desired item. The selected item
displays a speaker symbol to indicate it is the current
active source.
FM/AM: Press to switch between FM and AM radio
bands.
©SEEK ¨: Press to go to the previous or to the next
radio station and stay there.
Finding a XM™ Station
The radio only tunes into stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
m : Press to switch to XM mode. Turn the TUNE/TONE
knob to select from a list of available XM stations.
Turn the TUNE/TONE knob until the desired station
is highlighted. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to select
the highlighted station. The highlighted station will also
automatically be selected if the TUNE/TONE is released
and no longer turned.
INFO (Information) (FM-RDS, XM™ Satellite Radio
Service, CD-Text, CD Gracenote Database, HDD,
MP3/WMA, and iPod): Press to display additional text
information related to the currently playing content.
When information is not available, No Information
displays.
MENU/SELECT: For FM/AM stations, the MENU/
SELECT displays a list of available radio stations.
Under this menu, there is a refresh list selection that
allows the user to update the list for all available stations
that the radio is able to receive at the current location.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
CONFIG button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See
1. Press the CONFIG button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels on
the display and by using the radio favorites page button
(FAV button). Press the FAV button to go through up to
six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations
available per page. Each page of favorites can contain
any combination of AM, FM, or XM stations.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out,
to return to the original main radio screen showing
the radio station frequency labels and to begin
the process of programming favorites for the
chosen number of pages.
To store a station as a favorite, perform the following
steps:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed and
released, the radio recalls the station that was set.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to be stored as a favorite.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Tone
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade,
press the TUNE/TONE knob until the speaker control
labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired label. Turn the TUNE/TONE knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.
The highlighted setting can be adjusted by pressing
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble):
To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the
TUNE/TONE knob until the tone control labels display.
Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press
the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn
the TUNE/TONE knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting
can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV buttons until
the desired levels are obtained.
\ FWD, or s REV button until the desired levels are
obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or has static,
decrease the treble.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE
label for more than two seconds. A beep may sound and
the level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep may sound and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the TUNE/TONE knob for more
than two seconds.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the TUNE/TONE knob for more
than two seconds.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Centerpoint®: Select to enable Bose®
Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
Centerpoint®. Centerpoint® produces a full
vehicle surround sound listening experience from
CD, non-5.1 surround sound DVD-A, MP3/WMA,
AUX (auxiliary) input, or XM digital audio source and
will deliver five independent audio channels from
conventional two channel stereo recording.
If the radio has this feature, it is used to provide a
choice of different listening experiences. To choose a
DSP setting, perform the following steps:
1. Press the TUNE/TONE knob to display the
tone/speaker, and DSP labels.
This feature is not available in AM/FM radio mode.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the DSP label.
If the vehicle is equipped with the Bose® 5.1 Cabin
Surround® sound system, the radio can support the
playback of 5.1 Surround Sound DVD-A discs or DTS
5.1 Surround Sound CD discs. When a 5.1 Surround
Sound formatted disc is playing, DSP options
available are:
3. Press the Back button to exit the display.
To return to the original display, repeatedly press
the Back button or wait for the display to time out.
The DSP settings available are:
• Normal: Select for normal mode, this provides the
best sound quality for all seating positions.
− 5.1 Surround + Normal: Best for all seating
positions.
• Driver: Select to adjust the audio for the driver to
− 5.1 Surround + Rear: Best for the rear seating
position.
receive the best possible sound quality.
• Rear: Select to adjust the audio for the rear seat
passengers to receive the best possible sound
quality.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring Radio Functions
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM Radio
Online for when you are not in the vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM service. For more
information, contact XM at xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and xmradio.ca or
call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
CONFIG: Press to display FAV, AUTO VOL, XM
(if equipped), or HDD (if available), and Back. See the
information provided in this radio section to learn more
options about the FAV, AUTO VOL, XM, and HDD
(if available) label functions. See “Speed Compensated
Volume (SCV)” or “Noise Compensation Technology”
earlier for information on the AUTO VOL label. Press the
pushbutton located under the Back label to go back to the
previous display.
Radio Message
Locked: Displays when the THEFTLOCK® system
has locked up the radio. Take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Radio Messages for XM Only
section for further detail.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
Playing a CD (Single Disc Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in. The CD track number and a
Shuffle label displays. The CD begins playback.
Shuffle: Press the pushbutton located below the
Shuffle label to play the tracks of a CD in random order.
Press again to turn Shuffle off. Shuffle Off displays.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
^ (Load): Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
When a CD is inserted, the disc number displays on
the upper right side of the screen and the track number
displays at the left and center of the screen. The Shuffle
and Disc labels appear below. Press the pushbuttons
located under the Disc label to change to another disc.
The CD begins playback of the first track on the selected
disc. As each new track starts to play the track number
displays in the left and center of the screen.
To insert one CD:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
A Shuffle label and the DISC icon displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located below the Shuffle
label to play the tracks of a current disc in random
order. Press the pushbutton again to turn Shuffle off.
Shuffle Off displays.
Shuffle: Press the pushbutton located below the
Shuffle label to play the tracks of the CD that is currently
playing in random order. Press again to turn Shuffle
off. Shuffle Off displays
5. The CD resumes normal playback.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
Z (Eject): To eject the disc that is currently playing,
press and release. Ejecting Disc displays and a beep
sounds. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays.
The disc can be removed. If the disc is not removed, after
several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back into
the player and begins playing.
1. Press and hold this button for five seconds.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than five seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
Playing a DVD-A (Audio) Disc
The radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB is capable of
playing DVD audio discs in the Bose® 5.1 Cabin surround
sound system.
Insert the DVD audio disc into the CD/DVD-A player.
DVD AUDIO displays and playback begins. The Group
and track number displays during playback.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
This type of radio does not support the playback of DVD
video discs. If you attempt to play a DVD video disc,
the radio displays “Read Error Please Check Disc”
and ejects the disc.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume and the elapsed time of the track
displays. Release to resume playing the track.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to switch between
CD/DVD-A, auxiliary input, and USB devices.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to reverse playback
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Press once to change playback to a speed of 2X.
Each successive press changes playback to a speed
FM/AM: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
of 4X, 10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resume normal
CD: Press to play a CD when listening to the radio.
The disc and/or track number displays when a CD
is in the player.
playback. The elapsed time of the track displays.
While recording a disc to HDD, the fast reverse does not
function.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to automatically search for
an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Input Device Found” displays.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding Songs on DVD Audio
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to advance playback
quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Press once to change playback to a speed
of 2X. Each successive press changes playback to a
TUNE/TONE: Turn this knob to display a list of all
tracks in all groups on the DVD audio disc. Stop turning
this knob or press the TUNE/TONE knob to start
playback of a particular track.
speed of 4X, 10X, or 21X. Press r / j to resume normal
playback. The elapsed time of the track displays.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than five seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks within the current Group.
While recording a disc to HDD, the fast forward does not
function.
Stopping DVD Audio Playback
Press the pushbutton located under the c (stop) label
to stop playback of the DVD audio disc. “DVD PreStop”
displays. Press r / j to resume playback from where it
was stopped.
MENU/SELECT: To change Groups, press the
pushbutton located under the Menu label to display
a list of all Groups. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
highlight the desired Group. Press the MENU/SELECT
knob to select it. Playback begins from track 1 of the
selected Group.
Press the pushbutton located under the c label again
while in DVDPreStop, “DVDStop” displays. Press r / j
while in DVDStop to begin playback from the beginning of
the DVD audio disc.
Shuffle on DVD Audio
Press r / j during DVD audio playback to pause or
Press the pushbutton located under the Shuffle label
to begin random playback of all songs in the current
Group. Press again to turn off random playback.
resume playback.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting DVD Audio Streams
Care of Your CD and DVD-A Discs
Each DVD audio Group may contain audio content
that is encoded in one or two formats. For example,
a particular Group may have both a 5.1 surround audio
stream and a 2.0 stereo audio stream available.
If playing a CD or DVD-A disc, the sound quality can
be reduced due to disc quality, the method of recording,
the quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the disc has been handled. Handle them carefully.
Store disc(s) in their original cases or other protective
cases and away from direct sunlight and dust. The
CD/DVD-A player scans the bottom surface of the disc.
If the surface of a disc is damaged, such as cracked,
broken, or scratched, the disc may not play properly or
not at all. Do not touch the bottom side of a disc while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Press the pushbutton located under the Audio label
to display the current audio stream playing. “Audio
Stream 1” or “Audio Stream 2” briefly displays. Press the
pushbutton located under the Audio label again to toggle
between Audio Stream 1 or Audio Stream 2 (if available).
Check the DSP settings to determine if a 5.1 surround
sound Audio Stream is playing. See “Digital Signal
Processing (DSP)” earlier in this section. Press the DSP
label to see if the 5.1 + Normal or 5.1 + Rear settings
are available for selection. If these settings are available,
Audio Stream 1 is playing.
If the surface of a disc is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CD or DVD-A Player
Disc Messages
Do not add any label to a disc, it could get caught in the
CD/DVD-A player. If a disc is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, label the
top of the recorded disc with a marking pen.
DISC ERROR: If this message displays and/or the disc
ejects, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• The radio system does not support the playlist
format, the compressed audio format, or the data file
format.
The use of disc lens cleaners for discs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the disc
optics with lubricants internal to the CD/DVD-A player
mechanism.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the disc should play.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
• The disc is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the disc.
If an error displays, see “Disc Messages” later in this
section.
• The label could be caught in the CD/DVD-A player.
If the disc is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good disc.
Playing an MP3/WMA Disc
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Radios with the MP3 feature are capable of playing
an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. Radios with
the DVD Audio feature, are capable of playing
MP3/WMA on DVD+/-R discs. For more information,
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Recorded Song or Category
Hard Drive Device (HDD)
Radios with a hard drive device are able to record
songs from Audio CDs, MP3/WMA discs, and USB
mass storage devices. This type of radio has a
40 GB (gigabyte) HDD. A portion of the HDD is used
for the storage of radio system files. The remainder
of the HDD capacity is available for the storage of
media files.
DEL (Delete): You must select a song from one of the
song lists or you must be listening to a song to delete
it. Once the song is selected, press the DEL hard key.
To Delete an entire category, select a category and
press DEL.
Stopping the Recording
Music or content that is stored on the hard drive device
that you did not create, or have the right to distribute,
must be deleted before the sale or end of the lease
of the vehicle.
While recording from the audio CD, press the REC
button to display the stop recording option. Press the
pushbutton located under this option to confirm the
selection.
Recording From Audio CDs
Ejecting a CD or Turning Off The Vehicle
While Recording
REC (Record): While listening to an audio CD, press to
start recording songs from the disc. The radio has the
option to record the current song playing or all songs
from the CD. Press the pushbutton located under
the desired record option.
If the CD is ejected or the vehicle is turned off before
the recording process has completed, tracks that
have been completely recorded are stored to the HDD.
Incomplete tracks are discarded.
A status bar appears on the top of the display when
the recording process starts. The status bar disappears
when the process has ended. The recorded songs
are now available.
Re-recording Audio CDs
If a CD has already been recorded, the radio system
will not record the contents again. If a partially recorded
CD is selected for recording, only those songs which
are not already on the HDD will be recorded.
Copy Protected CD(s)
Make sure the disc is not copy-protected. The radio
does not copy a copy-protected CD to the HDD.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from the HDD. With a “MuliHit” song playing, press the
button below the EDIT label to bring up the list of
multiple names found in the Gracenote® Database.
Use the Menu/Select knob to highlight and select the
correct name for the “MultiHit” recorded CD.
The Gracenote® Database stored on the HDD can be
updated so that it includes name information for more
recently released audio CDs. See your dealer/retailer for
more information on Gracenote® Database updates for
the HDD radio.
Audio CD Song, Artist, Album and
Genre Information
Radios with HDD, contain a Gracenote® Database that
the radio uses to determine the song, artist, album and
genre information. The Gracenote® Database allows the
radio to record an audio CD to the HDD and store the
content using song, artist, album and genre information.
Newly released audio CDs as well as some less
common audio CDs may not be found in the Gracenote®
Database stored on the HDD. If these audio CDs contain
CD-text, the radio will use the CD-text information when
recording the content to the HDD. If an audio CD is not
found in the Gracenote® Database and it does not have
CD-text information, the radio will record the audio CD
with all song, artist, album and genre names as
“NO INFO”.
Gracenote® Database
Gracenote Music Recognition Service, Music
recognition technology, and related data are provided
by Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in
music recognition technology and related content
delivery. For more information, visit gracenote.com.
Songs recorded with “NO INFO” to the HDD will be hard
to sort, identify, and select. For better HDD navigation,
CDs with “NO INFO” can first be converted to MP3 format
with Tag information on a home computer and then
recorded to the HDD from an MP3 disc or USB device.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product and
service may practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773,
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending.
Some services supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Occasionally, the radio may find more than one match in
Gracenote® Database for an audio CD that has been
recorded. If this happens, the radio will display “MultiHit”
for the name information when the songs are selected
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of
Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and
the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions.
If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and
all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers.
If you require more information regarding the use of the
Gracenote Service, visit: gracenote.com/corporate
For the data provided by Gracenote® Music Recognition
Service, the content is not necessarily guaranteed 100%.
Regarding the use of Gracenote Music Recognition
Service. When this product is used, it is necessary to
agree to the following articles.
Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers,
including all ownership rights.
This application or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”).
Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable
for any payment to you for any information that you
provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its
own name.
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote
Software”) enables this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title
information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or
embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”)
and to perform other functions.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier
is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries
without knowing anything about who you are. For more
information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy
Policy for the Gracenote service.
You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the
intended End-User functions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your
own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to
assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data to any third party.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote
Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes
no representations or warranties, express or implied,
regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in
the Gracenote Servers.
Recording From MP3/WMA Discs
or USB
REC (Record): While listening to a MP3/WMA disc or
a USB device (excluding iPod), press to start recording
songs from the disc. The radio has the option to record
the current song playing or all songs from the disc. Press
the pushbutton located under the desired record option.
Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the
Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for
any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient.
No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or
Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted.
A status bar appears on the top of the display when the
recording process starts. The status bar disappears
when the process has ended. The recorded songs
are now available.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future and is
free to discontinue its services at any time.
AAC and OGG Vorbis file types are not fully supported.
These file types may or may not play and may be shown
without Tag information. Without Tag information
available, these file types may be identified only by
filename.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
Audiobooks from audible.com can also be transferred
to the HDD using the record function. See Audiobooks
later in this section for more information.
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE
SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
USB Host Support
The USB connector uses the USB standards, 1.1 and
2.0. This type of connector supports rates for low
speed (1.5 Mb/s), full speed (12 Mb/s), and high
speed (480 Mb/s).
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB Supported Devices
• USB Flash Drives
Mode
Song
When Displayed
System is playing back all songs
in alphabetical order.
System is playing back all songs
from the selected playlist in the
order they were added.
• Portable USB Hard Drives
Playlist
Playing From the Hard Drive Device
AudioBook
HDD Menu
System is playing back audio
book content.
HDD (Hard Drive Device): Press the HDD button to
start the HDD mode. HDD displays and playback
resumes from where it was last stopped.
HDD Playback Mode
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to display the
HDD Menu.
This radio system displays the current hard drive
playback mode. See the following table showing the
display mode options and what happens as the mode
is displayed:
2. Turn this knob to highlight an option from the
HDD Menu. The available options are:
• Shuffle Songs
• Playlist
Mode
When Displayed
System is randomly playing back
all HDD content.
System is playing back content
by a selected Artist in
alphabetical order.
System is playing back content
from a selected album in track
order.
System is playing back content in
a selected Genre in alphabetical
order.
• Artists
Shuffle
• Albums
Artist
• Song Titles
• Genres
Album
Genre
• Recently Saved
• Audiobook
3. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to select the
desired option.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Quick Jump
HDD Categories
To scroll up or down the list of Artists, Albums, or Song
Titles, press and hold the pushbutton located under
the FWD or REV tab.
The HDD category mode can be used to select a song
by a particular artist, album, or genre for playback. As an
example, the HDD Menu displays a layout such as:
To jump to the beginning, middle, or last section of
the list:
— Artists (5)
— Albums (6)
— Song Titles (77)
— Genres (3)
• Press the first pushbutton located under the display
to go to the beginning section of the list.
• Press the second pushbutton located under the
display to go to the middle section of the list.
The radio system displays the number of available items
in each individual category as shown on the sample
display. For example, the sample display shows there
is content on the hard drive from five individual artists.
• Press the third pushbutton located under the
display to go to the last section of the list.
Shuffle Songs
Select the HDD Menu category to display the available
items in each individual category, then select an item
from one of these submenus to display a list of songs
related to that menu item. Select a song to begin
playback of that song and to put the HDD in the
playback mode.
Select this option from the HDD Menu to randomly play
back HDD content.
Playlist
Select this option from the HDD Menu to display all
six favorite Playlists, then select one of the six playlist
to display a list of songs that have been added to that
favorite playlist. Select a song from the list to begin
playback of that song and to put the HDD into the
Playlist mode. See “Saving HDD Favorites” later
in this section for more information.
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recently Saved
Saving HDD Favorites
Select this option from the HDD Menu to display the last
50 songs added since the vehicle was last turned on.
The songs are categorized into songs recorded
from CDs or USB devices.
During HDD playback, press the FAV button to change
between favorite modes. The following favorite modes
are supported:
• Playlists
• Artists
Audiblebook
The radio is able to play back audio-book content
downloaded from audible.com®. This content can be
transferred into the HDD by either burning it to a CD or
copying it to a USB storage device and then recording
it to the HDD.
The audible.com® playback requires activation of the
vehicle as a player for downloaded content. The radio
system activates the audible.com® system when
information is found on either a CD inserted into
the CD/DVD-A player or if a USB storage device is
connected. The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
number is a required in order to activate the vehicle.
• Albums
• Genres
Favorites can be saved by pressing and holding the
pushbutton located under the favorites selection.
Store favorites according to the following table:
Favorites
Display Mode
Action on Press-and-Hold
Adds currently playing track to
the playlist selected.
Saves the artist associated with
the currently playing track in the
indicated favorites position.
Playlist
Artist
Saves the album associated with
the currently playing track in the
indicated favorites position.
Saves the genre associated with
the currently playing track in the
indicated favorites position.
Album
Genre
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the REV or FWD buttons to rewind or
fast forward through the time shift buffer. Hold FWD until
the end of the currently recorded buffer to resume “live”
radio playback. With “live” radio playing, the radio display
will no longer show the buffer bar below the station
number.
Configuring HDD Favorites
Press the CONFIG button to display the radio
configuration options. Press the pushbutton under
the HDD label to display the available favorite modes.
Press the pushbutton under the favorite label to set
the available favorite modes. Available favorite modes
are highlighted.
On AM/FM, press the REV or FWD button multiple
times to rewind or fast forward. Each press will rewind
or fast forward 30 seconds of content. On XM, press
the REV or FWD button multiple time to jump to
the previous or next song or commercial.
Time-shifting — Pause and Rewind Live
FM/AM and XM™ (if equipped)
The Radio with DVD Audio, HDD, and USB has
the ability to rewind 60 minutes of FM/AM and XM
(if equipped) content. While listening to the radio,
the content from the current station is always being
buffered to the HDD.
When the radio station is changed, the buffer is cleared
and automatically restarted for the current station.
You cannot rewind to content from a previously
tuned station.
Time shifting of AM/FM or XM is not available while
recording or while other sources of playback are
selected.
Press r / j (play/pause) To pause the radio. The
radio display will show the Time Shift buffer status bar.
The status bar shows the amount of content that is
stored in the buffer and the current pause point.
Pausing AM/FM or XM™ (if equipped) with
the Vehicle Turned Off
To resume playback from the current pause point,
press r / j again. The radio will no longer be playing
“live” radio. Instead, time shifted content is being played
from the buffer. When the radio is playing time shifted
content from the buffer, a buffer status bar shows below
the station number on the left side of screen.
If AM/FM or XM is paused when the vehicle is turned
off, the radio will continue to buffer the current radio
station for up to one hour. If the vehicle is turned
back on within one hour, the radio will automatically
resume playback from the pause point.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD or CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD
when a portable audio device is playing. Press again to
start playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not connected,
“No Aux Device” displays.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack. It is in the
center console bin. This is not an audio output; do not
plug the headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
An external audio device such as an iPod, laptop
computer, MP3 player, etc. can be connected to the
auxiliary input jack for use as another source for audio
listening.
Using the Radio Controls to Connect
and Control an iPod
An iPod can be controlled by using the radio buttons
and knobs; the song information shows on the radio’s
display. To connect and control the iPod using the radio
controls, the vehicle must have a USB port. If it does, it is
located in the center console bin. You will also need the
special iPod connection cable that came as standard
equipment with the vehicle as part of the USB option.
The special iPod connection cable can also be purchased
or made available, from your dealer/retailer. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is stopped.
on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
The radio automatically detects the device and “Aux Input
Device” displays. The device begins playing over the
vehicle speakers. If an auxiliary device has already been
connected, press the radio’s AUX or CD/AUX button.
This feature supports the following iPod models*:
• Fifth generation or later iPod
• First, Second, or Third generation iPod nano
• iPod touch
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Use the portable device to make
additional volume adjustments.
• iPod classic
FM/AM: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, until it is stopped.
* For proper operation, make sure the iPod has
the latest firmware from Apple®. The iPod firmware
can be updated using the latest iTunes application.
See apple.com/itunes.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To connect and control the iPod, connect one end
of the special iPod connection cable to the iPod’s dock
connector. Connect the other end to both the USB port
and the auxiliary input jack. The USB port and the
auxiliary input jack are located in the center console bin.
If the vehicle is on and the USB connection works,
a GM logo may appear on the iPod. The iPod’s music
information will be shown on the radio’s display and the
music begins playing through the vehicles audio system.
If you have an older iPod model that is not supported or
do not have the special iPod connection cable, you can
still listen to the iPod in the vehicle by connecting it to the
Auxiliary Input Jack using a standard 3.5 mm (1/8 inch)
stereo cable. Command and control of the iPod via the
radio buttons and knobs will not be supported when only
using the Auxiliary Input Jack. See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack” earlier for more information.
Press the AM/FM, XM or HDD buttons to listen to one
of these sources while an iPod is connected. If a disc
is inserted, press the CD/AUX button to listen to a CD or
DVD-A disc. Press the CD/AUX button again to start
playing and controlling the connected iPod.
A standard iPod USB cable, like the one that came with
the iPod, cannot be used to connect an iPod to the
vehicle. You must use the special iPod connection cable
that came equipped with the vehicle or that was made
available from your dealer/retailer in order for this
feature to work.
To properly dismount the iPod USB device before
disconnecting from the vehicle, press the button directly
under the EJECT label found on the iPod playback
screen.
Use the radio Menu/Select knob to bring up the iPod
Menu and select Songs, Artists, Albums, Playlists
and Audio books to play from the iPod.
The iPod’s battery charges while it is connected to the
vehicle and if the ignition is turned to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN. It can also be left connected to the vehicle
after the vehicle is turned off. With the vehicle turned off,
the iPod will automatically be powered off and will not
charge or draw power from the vehicle’s battery.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders and playlists, and 255 files to
read and play.
Using an MP3
MP3/WMA Format
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
The Single CD and the Six-Disc CD Radio will play
MP3/WMA files that were recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc. The HDD Radio is similar and can also
play MP3/WMA files recorded on DVD +/− R discs or
a USB storage device.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
8 subfolders deep, keep the total number of
folders to a minimum to reduce the complexity
and confusion during playback.
The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit
rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps,
96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate.
Song title, artist name, and album can display when
files are recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension
(other file extensions may not work).
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to
play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions.
Creating an MP3/WMA Disc
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a personal
computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Adding
music to an existing disc can cause the disc not
to function.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playlists can be selected by using the previous and next
Empty Directory or Folder
folder buttons, the SEEK arrows, \ FWD, or s REV
buttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was
recorded using no file folders can also be played. If a
CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of
50 folders and playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you
access and navigate up to the maximum, but all items
over the maximum are not accessible.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders
and no compressed files directly beneath them,
the player advances to the next folder in the file
structure that contains compressed audio files.
No Folder
The HDD Radio can support more than 255 files on an
MP3/WMA disc.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. The radio displays
F1 DISC for the root directory.
The HDD Radio does not support playlists on a disc or
USB storage device.
Root Directory
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. The radio displays F1 DISC for the root directory.
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as F1 DISC. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. Playlists (Px) are always accessed
after root folders or files.
The HDD Radio displays the root directory of an
MP3/WMA disc as F1 MP3 and the root directory
of a USB storage device as F1 USB.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Track names longer than 32 characters are shortened.
Parts of words on the last page of text and the
extension of the filename is not displayed.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW play in the
following order:
The HDD Radio will display file names with the
extension.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first playlist.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are special folders
containing compressed audio song files. Playlists
must have a file extension of PLS or M3U.
− Playlists can be changed by pressing the next
and previous folder button.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has
played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
Playlists can be selected using the previous and next
folder buttons. Tracks can be changed by pressing
the seek buttons or turning the tune knob. Songs are
played sequentially; press the s REV or \ FWD
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the folder
mode has been chosen as the default display. The new
track name displays.
to reverse or advance through the playing song.
The HDD Radio does not support preprogrammed
playlists. To create a playlist on the HDD radio from
songs recorded to the HDD, see “Saving HDD Favorites”
earlier in this section.
File System and Naming
The song name displays the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not in the
ID3 tag, the radio displays the file name without the
extension.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing an MP3/WMA
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current MP3/WMA file, if more than five seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA
file. If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
MP3/WMA files on the CD.
Insert a CD partway into the slot (Single CD Player),
or press the load button and wait for the message
to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side up.
The player pulls in the CD and should begin playing.
For the Single CD Player, the track number displays at
the left and center of the screen. A Shuffle label appears
below. Press the pushbutton located under the Shuffle
label to play the MP3/WMA files of the CD in random
order.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton under
the Folder label to go to the first track in the previous
folder.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton under the
For the Six-Disc CD Player, the disc number displays
at the upper right side of the screen. The track number
displays at the left and center of the screen. The Shuffle,
Disc, and Folder labels appear below. Press the
pushbutton located under the Shuffle label to play the
MP3/WMA files of the currently selected CD in random
order. Press the pushbuttons located under the Disc or
Folder labels to change to another disc or folder.
Folder label to go to the first track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback
quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. The elapsed time of the file displays.
Release to resume playing the file.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound is
heard at a reduced volume. The elapsed time of the
file displays. Release to resume playing the file.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
Z (Eject): Press to eject a CD. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player and begins playing.
Shuffle: With the shuffle setting, MP3/WMA files on the
CD can be played in random, rather than sequential
order, on the CD currently playing. To use shuffle:
• To play MP3/WMA files from the CD in random
order, press the pushbutton under the Shuffle
label until Shuffle On displays. Press again to
turn shuffle off.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button
for two seconds to eject all discs.
TUNE/TONE: Turn to select MP3/WMA files on the CD
playing.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working properly.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area,
the signal should return.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle.
For security purposes, XM receivers cannot be
swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having the vehicle serviced, check
with your dealer/retailer.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Voice Recognition
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum.
The system may not recognize voice commands if
there is too much background noise.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have
a fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
Navigation/Radio System
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
Audio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and over-rides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level.
The adjusted volume level remains in memory for later
calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum volume level
is used if the volume is turned down too low.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and
receive phone calls. The system can be used while the
ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 30 ft.
(9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions, and not
all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth for more
information on compatible phones.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing Information:
Bluetooth Controls
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
information.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
c ª(Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
Pairing
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar® Hands-Free
Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner’s guide for
more information.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system,
the system responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the
system responds with a tone. After the tone
say “Hands Free”. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
• For vehicles without a navigation system,
the system responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the
system responds with a tone. After the tone
say “Hands Free”. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN number
that was provided in Step 3.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Deleting a Paired Phone
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system,
the system responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the
system responds with a tone. After the tone
say “Hands Free”. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
Storing Name Tags
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the
number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
number to be re-entered.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system,
the system responds with “Ready” followed
by a tone.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the
system responds with a tone. After the tone
say “Hands Free”. The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with
“Store, number please” followed by a tone.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
Using the Directory Command
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete
the name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
To use the delete command:
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
Using the Dial Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
Making a Call
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by a tone.
Calls can be made using the following commands:
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
• Dial
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• Digit Dial
• Call
• If the system does not recognize the number,
it confirms the numbers followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
• Re-dial
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Digit Dial Command
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by
a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The
system responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>”
and dials the number. If the name tag is not
correct, say “No”. The system will ask for the
name tag to be re-entered.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Re-dial Command
Call Waiting
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
• Press c ª to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
Three-Way Calling
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth
phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier
to work.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c ª to ignore a call.
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
Ending a Call
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
Press c ªto end a call.
Muting a Call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
To Mute a call
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes
after the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY position.
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with
“Call muted”.
To Cancel Mute
1. During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
press and hold b g for two seconds:
followed by a tone.
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the call
transfers to the Bluetooth system.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the
system responds with a tone. After the tone say
“Hands Free”. The call then transfers to the
Bluetooth system.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Pass-Thru
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers
and numbers stored as name tags during a call.
This is used when calling a menu driven phone
system. Account numbers can be programmed into
the phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds:
• For vehicles without a navigation system, the
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Sending a number during a call
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
• For vehicles with a navigation system, the system
responds with a tone. After the tone say “Hands
Free”. The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with
“OK, accessing <phone name>”.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by
the Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks
and trade names are those of their respective owners.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Say the name tag to send.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone.
If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Clearing the System
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely.
This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press to interact with the Bluetooth® system. See
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the volume.
b g (Mute/Speech Recognition/Push to Talk): Press
and release to silence the vehicle speakers only. The
audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if the
vehicle has these features, does not mute. Press and
release b g again, to turn the sound on.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, press
and hold g for two seconds to initiate speech
recognition. See “Speech Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
Left-Side Steering
Wheel Controls for CTS
(CTS-V Similar)
Right-Side Steering
Wheel Controls for CTS
and CTS-V
• For vehicles without a navigation system, press and
Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ
depending on the vehicle’s options. Some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
hold g for two seconds to interact with OnStar® or
about these features.
SRCE (Source): Press to switch between the
radio AM, FM, XM, CD, HDD, auxiliary input jack,
USB and iPod.
• For vehicles with a navigation system, Onstar,
or Bluetooth, press and hold g for two seconds
and say “hands free” to interact with OnStar
more information about these features.
y / c z (Previous/Next): Press to go to the
previous or next radio station stored as a favorite,
or the previous or next track of a CD.
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Radio Reception
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States,
and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to
fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under
heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause
loss of the XM signal for a period of time.
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory power outlet.
AM
Cellular Phone Usage
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when making
or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s battery,
or simply having the phone on. This interference causes
an increased level of static while listening to the radio.
If static is received while listening to the radio, unplug
the cellular phone and turn it off.
FM Stereo
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings
or hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tinting
with metallic film. The metallic film in some tinting
materials will interfere with or distort the incoming
radio reception. Any damage caused to your
backglass antenna due to metallic tinting materials
will not be covered by your warranty.
Backglass Antenna
The AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rear window
defogger, located in the rear window. Make sure that
the inside surface of the rear window is not scratched
and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the
inside surface is damaged, it could interfere with radio
reception. For proper radio reception, the antenna
connector needs to be properly attached to the post
on the glass.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to
the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM
antenna are not damaged. There is enough space
between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone
antenna without interfering with radio reception.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to
clear the inside rear window may damage the rear
window antenna and/or the rear window defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not clear the inside rear window with sharp
objects.
3-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively
is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the
vehicle while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of the vehicle.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years, more than 17,000 annual
motor vehicle-related deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about 250,000 people injured.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-4.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being
driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes.
If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder
to push down. If the engine stops, there will still be
some power brake assist but it will be used when the
brake is applied. Once the power assist is used up,
it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal will
be harder to push.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-4.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a
braking skid.
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on, and it might even be noticed that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed
to get a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in
front of you, there will not be enough time to apply the
brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The antilock pump
or motor might be heard operating and the brake pedal
might be felt to pulsate, but this is normal.
page 3-39.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
StabiliTrak® System
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
The vehicle has an electronic stability control system
called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer controlled
system that assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Brake Assist (Except CTS-V)
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between your intended path and the
direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak
selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the
vehicle’s brakes to help steer the vehicle in the direction
which you are steering.
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed
to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature
uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module
to supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down
the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control
module increases brake pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor brake pedal
pulsations or pedal movement during this time is normal
and the driver should continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates The Brake Assist feature
will automatically disengage when the brake pedal is
released or brake pedal pressure is quickly decreased.
When the system activates, the Traction Control
System (TCS)/StabiliTrak warning light on the instrument
panel cluster flashes. You may also hear a noise or feel
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to
steer the vehicle in the direction you want it to go.
If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak, a
Service Stability System message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) and the TCS/StabiliTrak
warning light on the instrument panel cluster comes on.
When this message and warning light displays, the
system is not operational. Driving should be adjusted
on page 3-30 for more information.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak comes on automatically whenever the vehicle
is started. The system should be left on to help assist with
directional control of the vehicle. If StabiliTrak needs to
be turned off, press the TC (traction control) on/off button.
The TCS/StabiliTrak® warning light will flash when the
traction control system is limiting wheel spin.
The TCS/StabiliTrak
warning light comes on if
there is a problem with
the traction control system.
If cruise control is being used when the StabiliTrak
activates, the cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow, reengage the cruise
information.
on page 4-6. When the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light
is on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. On a rear-wheel-drive vehicle, the
system operates if it senses that one or both of the rear
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction. On an
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) vehicle, the system will operate if
it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning
to lose traction. When this happens, the system brakes
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduces engine power to
limit wheel spin.
TCS automatically comes on whenever the vehicle is
started. To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road
conditions, the system should always be left on, but it
may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is
stuck in sand, mud or snow and rocking the vehicle is
required. Also, turn TCS off while in deep snow or on
loose gravel, to assist vehicle motion at lower speeds.
for information on using TCS when driving in snowy or icy
conditions.
The system may be heard or felt while it is working,
but this is normal.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn the system off,
press the TCS/StabiliTrak
button located on the
instrument panel (CTS)
or the steering
Competitive Driving Mode
To select this optional handling mode, press the
TCS/StabiliTrak button quickly two times and the
STABILITRAK COMPETITVE MODE displays in the
Driver Information Center (DIC). While in the StabiliTrak
Competitive Mode, TCS does not limit wheel spin, and
the TCS/StabiliTrak warning light comes on. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
wheel (CTS-V).
Press and release the TCS/StabiliTrak button
Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button again, or turn the
ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY and restart the vehicle, to
turn TCS back on and turn the TCS/StabiliTrak warning
light off.
and the traction control system will turn off and the
TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will come on. Press the
button again to turn the system back on. For information
on turning StabiliTrak off and on, see StabiliTrak System
previously.
Notice: When traction control is turned off, or
Competitive Driving Mode is active, it is possible to
lose traction. If you attempt to shift with the drive
wheels spinning with a loss of traction, it is possible
to cause damage to the transmission. Do not attempt
to shift when the drive wheels do not have traction.
Damage caused by misuse of the vehicle is not
covered. See the warranty book for additional
information.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and release this
button, located in the
center of the instrument
panel, to change modes.
Magnetic Ride Control™
With this feature on the CTS-V, the Magnetic Ride
Control system adjusts the ride of the vehicle to Touring
or Sport modes. Magnetic Ride Control monitors the
suspension system to determine the proper system
response.
TOUR: Use for normal city and highway driving.
This setting provides a smooth, soft ride.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
SPORT: Use where road conditions or personal
preference demand more control. This setting provides
more “feel”, or response to road conditions.
Vehicles with a limited-slip rear axle can give more
traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works
like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction
is low, this feature allows the drive wheel with the
most traction to move the vehicle.
The setting can be changed at any time. Based on road
conditions, steering wheel angle and the vehicle speed,
the system automatically adjusts to provide the best
handling while providing a smooth ride. The Touring and
Sport modes will feel similar on a smooth road. Select a
new setting whenever driving conditions change.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
With this feature, the AWD system will automatically
monitor and adjust engine power to the front and rear
wheels for the best traction and handling. If there is a loss
of traction or stability, the AWD system works with the
electronic stability control system to increase power to
the front wheels as necessary.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) briefly displays
SUSPENSION MODE TOURING or SUSPENSION
MODE SPORT on vehicle startup or when a new mode
is selected.
If the spare tire is on the vehicle, there may be a slight
reduction in performance of the AWD system.
AWD related DIC messages.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Tips
Steering
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Power Steering
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Speed Variable Assist Steering
The vehicle has a steering system that varies the
amount of effort required to steer the vehicle in relation
to the speed of the vehicle.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
The amount of steering effort required is less at slower
speeds to make the vehicle more maneuverable and
easier to park. At faster speeds, the steering effort
increases to provide a sport-like feel to the steering.
This provides maximum control and stability.
If the vehicle seems harder to steer than normal when
parking or driving slowly, there may be a problem
with the system. You will still have power steering,
but steering will be stiffer than normal at slow speeds.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out
from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked
cars and stops right in front of you. These problems
can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time.
But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is
no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and
a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the
object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement.
Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about
one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving to these conditions.
It is important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are
not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting
to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the
tires to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid only
the acceleration skid. If the traction control system is
off, then an acceleration skid is best handled by easing
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Competitive Driving
Driving at Night
Competitive driving may affect the vehicle warranty.
See the warranty book before using the vehicle
for competitive driving.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
Notice: If you use your vehicle for competitive
driving, the engine may use more oil than it would
with normal use. Low oil levels can damage the
engine. Be sure to check the oil level often during
competitive driving and keep the level at or near the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range
on the engine oil dipstick. For information on how
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
CTS-V Only: For competitive driving, it is recommended
that the brake fluid be replaced with a high performance
brake fluid that has a dry boiling point greater than 534°F
(279°C). After conversion to the high performance brake
fluid, follow the brake fluid service recommendations
outlined by the fluid manufacturer. Do not use silicone
or DOT-5 brake fluids.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and
affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive
slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and deep-standing or
flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
{ CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Allow extra following distance.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
• Pass with caution.
up-to-date maps?
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
Highway Hypnosis
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
• Turn off cruise control.
Other driving tips include:
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
clean — inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hill and Mountain Roads
{ CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{ CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
improves the ability to accelerate on slippery roads,
but slow down and adjust your driving to the road
conditions. When driving through deep snow, turn off
the traction control system to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between
the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing
rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads
can be treated with salt or sand.
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads, but
apply the brakes sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Blizzard Conditions
CAUTION: (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation.
Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby.
To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting.
See Climate Control System in the Index.
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
Spin the wheels as little as possible and avoid
going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal
slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed.
This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle
and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading the Vehicle
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area
around the front wheels. Turn off any traction or stability
system. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a
forward gear, or with a manual transmission, between
1 (First) or 2 (Second) and R (Reverse), spinning the
wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting,
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in
the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the
vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out.
If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label, and the Certification label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
on page 5-72.
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
Example Label
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading
Information label is attached to the vehicle’s
center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door open,
you will find the label attached below the door lock
post (striker). The Tire and Loading Information
label shows the number of occupant seating
positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
Example 1
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
for important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract
Subtract
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
Occupant Weight
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers, and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s capacity weight.
shows the gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification
label also shows the maximum weights for
the front and rear axles, called the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Never exceed the GVWR
or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
Certification Label
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the vehicle.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label is attached to
either the driver’s door edge or the lower center
pillar on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This label
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle, like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else, they will go
as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service if the disabled vehicle needs to be towed.
{ CAUTION:
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see Recreational Vehicle Towing following.
Things you put inside the vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.
In a trunk, put them as far forward as you
can. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing the vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing the vehicle with two wheels on the ground
and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground.
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
The vehicle was not designed to be towed with all
four wheels on the ground. If a rear-wheel-drive vehicle
must be towed, a dolly or a trailer should be used. If an
all-wheel-drive vehicle must be towed, a trailer should be
used. See “Dolly Towing” following for more information.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 2-44.
Dolly Towing
(Rear-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
4. Put the vehicle in P (Park) for an automatic
transmission or in 1 (First) for a manual
transmission.
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to
the dolly.
6. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two
of its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Do not tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle
with any of its wheels on the ground.
All-wheel-drive vehicles can only be towed with all
four wheels on a trailer.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
rear-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Put the rear wheels on the dolly.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment.
Towing a Trailer (CTS-V)
The CTS-V is neither designed nor intended to tow
a trailer.
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read
the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
Towing a Trailer (CTS)
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used
properly.
{ CAUTION:
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully
before pulling a trailer.
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even at
all. The driver and passengers could be seriously
injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only if all the steps in
this section have been followed. Ask your dealer/
retailer for advice and information about towing a
trailer with the vehicle.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires
are forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. The trailer also adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer.
Pulling A Trailer
Here are some important points:
• The weight of the trailer tongue.
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• The total weight on the vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much
the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and
the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section
for more information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in
at the heavier loads.
• Vehicles with automatic transmissions can tow in
D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear
if the transmission shifts too often under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, it is better not to use the
highest gear.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h), to
save wear on the vehicle’s parts.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance Offices.
information.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the
vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the
people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot
of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the
vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can
carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle
can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be
added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying
for more information about the vehicle’s maximum load
capacity.
For a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle, or
the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
Trailer Brakes
• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Does the trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
• Will any holes be made in the body of the vehicle
when the trailer hitch is installed? If so, be sure to
seal the holes when the hitch is removed. If they
are not sealed, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from
the engine’s exhaust can get into the vehicle. See
also prevent dirt and water from entering the vehicle.
Because the vehicle has StabiliTrak®, do not try to tap
into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system. If you do,
both brake systems will not work well, or at all.
Trailer Wiring Harness
All of the electrical circuits required for the trailer lighting
system can be accessed at the driver’s side rear lamp
connector. This connector is located under the carpet on
the rear corner of the trunk compartment.
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Passing
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Get to know the rig before setting out
for the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you
are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving
and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to
be sure the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Driving On Grades
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the
vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not.
It is important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce the
vehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions. For vehicles with
a manual transmission, it is better not to use the
highest gear.
The vehicle has bulb warning lights. When a trailer
lighting system is plugged into the vehicle’s lighting
system, its bulb warning lights may not let the driver
know if one of the lamps goes out. So, when the a trailer
lighting system plugged in, be sure to check the vehicle
and trailer lamps from time to time to be sure they are all
working. Once the trailer lamps are disconnected, the
bulb warning lights can again let the driver know that
one of the vehicle lamps is out.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this, let the engine run while
parked, preferably on level ground, with the automatic
transmission in P (Park) or the manual transmission in
N (Neutral) for a few minutes before turning the engine
off. If the overheat warning comes on, see Engine
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
Parking on Hills
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
{ CAUTION:
4. Reapply the brake pedal. For vehicles with an
automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
and shift into P (Park). For vehicles with a manual
transmission, apply the parking brake, place
the transmission in 1 (First) and turn the ignition
to OFF/LOCK.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
5. Release the brake pedal.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but if the vehicle has an
automatic transmission, do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• Start the engine
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling
a trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect
these before and during the trip.
• Shift into a gear
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
The cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-38.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability,
ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes,
traction control, and stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause malfunction or damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer/retailer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric fasteners can be
easily confused. If the wrong fasteners are
used, parts can later break or fall off. You could
be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain
perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the
mileage and the date of any service work performed.
Gasoline Octane
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code V), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87, you
might notice an audible knocking noise when you drive,
commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.
If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and
you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 engine (VIN Code 7), use
regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 87 or higher. For best performance or trailer towing,
you could choose to use middle grade 89 octane
unleaded gasoline. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this occurs,
use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the 6.2L supercharged V8 engine
(VIN Code P), use premium unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 91 or higher. For best
California Fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, the
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check
If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
performance, use premium unleaded gasoline with a
posted octane rating of 93. In an emergency, you can use
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or
higher. If 87 octane fuel is used, do not perform any
aggressive driving maneuvers such as wide open throttle
applications. You might also hear audible spark knock
during acceleration. Refill the tank with premium fuel as
soon as possible to avoid damaging the engine. If you are
using gasoline rated at 91 octane or higher and you hear
heavy knocking, the engine needs service.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
Additives
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of
the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the vehicle
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is behind a hinged fuel door on the
passenger side. To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release and it will open.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
page 3-42.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
The Tighten Gas Cap message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) displays if the fuel cap is not properly
page 3-57 for more information.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for you. If
you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This
may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light
and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood release
lever with this symbol
on it. It is located inside
the vehicle on the
lower left side of the
instrument panel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and find the
secondary hood release lever. The lever is located
under the front edge of the grille near the center.
Push the release lever up and raise the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-42.
G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under Engine
page 5-18.
page 5-48.
J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (If Equipped) (Not Shown).
See “When to Check and What to Use” under
on page 5-48.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir (Out of View).
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
page 5-30.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CTS-V
When you open the hood on the 6.2L Super Charged engine, you will see the following:
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-42.
page 5-30.
J. Hydraulic Clutch Reservoir (If Equipped) (Not Shown).
See “When to Check and What to Use” under
page 5-48.
on page 5-48.
page 5-44.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap (Out of View). See “When to
L. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil” under
M. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (Under Engine
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each
fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must
be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
There is an oil pressure
light in the instrument
cluster and an Oil Pressure
Low Stop Engine message
on the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the
oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
If the light and/or message appear, check the engine
oil level right away. For more information, see “Oil
Pressure Low Stop Engine” under DIC Warnings and
page 3-45. Check the engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the engine
oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil level is within the cross-hatched area at the
tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the proper
operating range and into the upper cross-hatched
area on the dipstick, the engine could be damaged.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using oils that do not have the GM4718M
Standard designation can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for three things:
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
This vehicle’s engine was filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil meeting all requirements for this
vehicle.
• GM4718M
This vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this standard
may be identified as synthetic. However, not all
synthetic oils will meet this GM standard. Use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain engine
oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M might not
be available. You can add substitute oil designated
SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all temperatures.
Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard GM4718M
should not be used for an oil change.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A Change Engine Oil Soon message comes on. See DIC
as soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions, the
oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important to
check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are
all that is needed for good performance and engine
protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system must
be reset every time the oil is changed.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where the oil is changed prior to a Change Engine Oil
Soon message being turned on, reset the system.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC
for more than five seconds. The oil life will change
to 100%.
If the Change Engine Oil Soon message comes back on
when the vehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life System
has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove:
Engine Cover
1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).
Engine Cover (CTS)
2. Raise the right front corner of engine cover (B) to
release from the ball stud.
3. Pull the engine cover (B) forward to slide the rear
tabs (C) out from under the retainers.
4. Lift and remove the engine cover.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall engine
cover.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove:
Engine Cover (CTS-V)
The engine cover consists of two pieces. Only the larger
piece needs to be removed to access the engine oil
and power steering fill caps.
1. Raise the front of engine cover (A) to release from
the ball studs (B).
2. Pull the engine cover forward until clear of the
smaller piece.
3. Lift and remove the engine cover.
4. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall engine
cover.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter:
1. Turn the ignition off.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is in the engine
compartment on the driver side of the vehicle,
near the front. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-14 for more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
2. Remove the side cover by pulling up on the front of
the cover.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter is
required.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector from the air box.
6. Remove the three air cleaner housing cover
screws.
4. Loosen the screw on the clamp holding the air
outlet duct in place. Do not remove the clamp.
Move the duct aside.
5. Remove the hose from the air cleaner housing
mounting arm. Move the hose aside.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Pivot the air cleaner housing cover and remove the
cover from the air cleaner housing.
8. Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner
housing.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reinstall Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
1. Install the air cleaner into the air cleaner housing.
The outer air cleaner filter seal must be fitted
properly in the air cleaner housing.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
2. Align the air cleaner housing cover tabs to the air
cleaner housing.
3. Install the air cleaner housing cover.
4. Install the air cleaner housing cover screws.
5. Install the hose to the air cleaner housing mounting
arm. The hose must be routed correctly.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into the engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
6. Install the air cleaner outlet duct to the air cleaner
housing.
7. Tighten the air cleaner outlet duct screw clamp.
8. Attach the electrical connector to the air box.
9. Reinstall the side cover.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. A
transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss. If a
leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealer/retailer service
department and have it repaired as soon as possible.
Manual Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the manual transmission fluid
level. A transmission fluid leak is the only reason for fluid
loss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to a dealer/retailer
for service. Have it repaired as soon as possible. You
may also have the fluid level checked by your dealer/
retailer when the oil is changed. See Recommended
to use.
There is a special procedure for checking and changing
the transmission fluid. Because this procedure is
difficult, it should be done at the dealer/retailer service
department. Contact your dealer/retailer for additional
information or the procedure can be found in the service
manual. To purchase a service manual, see Service
Hydraulic Clutch
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding fluid
will not correct a leak. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Check and What to Use
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper
page 6-14. The fluid requires changing every two years.
How to Check and Add Fluid
Visually check the clutch fluid reservoir to make sure
the fluid level is at the MIN (minimum) line on the side of
the reservoir. The hydraulic clutch fluid system should
be closed and sealed.
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s) (Out of View)
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
Do not remove the cap to check the fluid level or to
top-off the fluid level. Remove the cap only when
necessary to add the proper fluid until the level reaches
the MIN line.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in
the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle for all engines and
the intercooler is filled with DEX-COOL®. This coolant is
designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
{ CAUTION:
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could
get too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used,
the engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the surge tank.
If the coolant inside the surge tank is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible but
the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be
sure the cooling system is cool before this is done. See
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
If the engine is warm or hot, the coolant level should be
at or above the FROID/FULL COLD line on the side
of the coolant surge tank. If the engine is cold, the
coolant level should be near the FROID/FULL COLD
line on the side of the coolant surge tank. If it is
not, there could be a leak in the cooling system.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
The engine coolant reservoir is located in the engine
compartment on the driver side of the vehicle. See
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
If coolant is needed, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when
the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank
pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer
hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter turn and then stop.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and
remove it.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. The upper radiator hose
is the top hose coming out of the radiator, on the
passenger side of the vehicle. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FROID/FULL COLD
line on the side of the coolant surge tank.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to slightly above the FROID/FULL COLD line on the
side of the coolant surge tank.
Recheck the coolant level in the bottle next time you
use your vehicle to insure the system is full when cold.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant in the Intercooler
System (CTS-V)
Adding Coolant to the Intercooler
System Coolant (CTS-V)
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking
the coolant level.
The super charged engine intercooler coolant fill bottle is
located in the engine compartment on the passenger side
page 5-14.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant fill bottle.
If the coolant inside the coolant fill bottle is boiling, do not
do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the COLD FILL
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant fill bottle, but be sure
the cooling system is cool before this is done.
If the engine is warm or hot, the coolant level should be at
or above the COLD FILL line on the side of the coolant fill
bottle. If the engine is cold, the coolant level should be
near the COLD FILL line on the side of the coolant fill
bottle. If it is not, you could have a leak in the cooling
system.
1. Remove the intercooler system pressure cap when
the intercooler system hoses are no longer hot. Turn
the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. This allows any pressure still left to be
vented.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly and
remove it.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the
fill neck until the coolant reaches the COLD FILL
line on the fill neck.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
With the intercooler system pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run for a couple of minutes. Then
turn the engine off. By this time, the coolant level
inside the fill neck may be lower. If the level drops to
where coolant is no longer visible in the horizontal
tube section of the fill neck, with the engine off add
more of the DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the fill
neck until the level is again visible in the horizontal
tube section
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
Engine Overheating
4. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur.
Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured.
There are two engine hot messages that may be
displayed in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
more information.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the system
cools down again, see your dealer/retailer.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be running.
If they are not, do not continue to run the engine and
have the vehicle serviced.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn you
badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam coming
from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign
of steam or coolant before you open the hood.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving
with no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine Protection
driving to a safe place in an emergency.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
on page 5-41 for information on driving to a safe
place in an emergency.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is displayed but no steam
can be seen or heard, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when the vehicle:
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
• Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
• Stops after high-speed driving.
• Idles for long periods in traffic.
• Tows a trailer.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
next in this section.
1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Power Steering Fluid
the location of the power
steering fluid reservoir.
This operating mode allows your vehicle to be driven
to a safe place in an emergency. Should a hot engine
condition exist, an overheat protection mode which
alternates firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine
damage. In this mode, there is a loss in power and engine
performance. Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing
a trailer in the overheat protection mode should be
avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any repair.
The engine oil will be severely degraded. Repair the
cause of coolant loss and change the oil. See Engine
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you
hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and
repaired.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
What to Use
To check the power steering fluid:
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
page 6-14.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
The level should be between the HOT and COLD marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
When adding windshield washer fluid to the vehicle, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a
fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Adding Washer Fluid
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding water.
The Washer Fluid Low Add Fluid message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) when the fluid level is
more information.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts of
the washer system. Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT
3 brake fluid. See Engine
page 5-14 for the location
of the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
If the ignition is in ON/RUN and the brake fluid is low,
the Service Brake System message displays in the DIC.
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
DOT 3 brake fluid is recommended. DOT 4 brake fluid is
also compatible with the vehicle’s brake system parts.
However, if DOT 4 fluid is used, it is recommended that
the brake hydraulic system be flushed and refilled with
new DOT 4 fluid at a regular maintenance service every
page 6-6. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-14.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{ CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Wear
Brake Pedal Travel
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are
needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the
time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time the brakes are applied, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
{ CAUTION:
Replacing Brake System Parts
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. It is located
in the trunk, behind the trim panel, on the passenger side
of the vehicle. When it is time for a new battery, see your
dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement number
shown on the original battery’s label.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
After a power loss, such as disconnecting the battery or
removing the maxi fuses in the power distribution fuse
block, the following steps must be performed to calibrate
the electronic throttle control. If this is not done, the
engine will not run properly.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. Do not start the
engine.
2. Leave the ignition in ON/RUN for at least
three minutes so that the electronic throttle
control will cycle and re-learn its home position.
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Start and run the engine for at least 30 seconds.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have
a 12-volt battery with a negative ground
system.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+) and
negative (−) terminal locations or the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals of the
other vehicle. Then locate the remote positive (+)
location on your vehicle. See Engine Compartment
locations the terminals.
Notice: If you connect a negative cable to the
Engine Control Module (ECM), ECM mounting
bracket, or any cables that attach to the ECM
bracket, you may damage the ECM. Always attach
the negative cable to your vehicle’s remote negative
ground location, instead of the ECM, ECM bracket,
or any cables attached to the ECM bracket.
{ CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−) ground
location, as shown in the illustration. It is located on
the rear passenger side of the vehicle. See
should always use this remote ground location,
instead of the terminal on the battery.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead battery,
but not near engine parts that move. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has
one. Your vehicle’s remote negative (−) ground
location is for this purpose.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always
connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
How to Check Lubricant
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel-drive, this is an
additional system that needs lubrication.
A. Drain Plug
B. Fill Plug
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
It is not necessary to regularly check the transfer case
fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear
an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the transfer case, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten
the plug.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
located on the rear axle, you’ll need to add some
lubricant. Add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should:
What to Use
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
• Normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
• Have all tires properly inflated.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
• If your vehicle has a spare tire, ensure the spare tire
is in its original location in the vehicle.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps
as described.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
for more information.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp.
Halogen Headlamps
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. At a wall, measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) the width of the
vehicle at the wall where it was marked in Step 4.
Driver Side Shown
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
They are covered by a rubber caps.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
6 mm hex driver.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
The top edge of the cut-off should be positioned at
the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
{ CAUTION:
The High Intensity Discharge (HID) lighting system
operates at a very high voltage. If you try to service
any of the system components, you could be
seriously injured. Have your dealer/retailer or a
qualified technician service them.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may have HID headlamps. After the
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced, you
may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
Front Turn Signal and Fog Lamps
Halogen Bulbs
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
To replace fog lamp bulb:
1. Pull out the push-pins located on the underside of
the protection shield to remove the shield.
2. Reach up behind the front bumper area from under
the vehicle to access the lamp housing.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by
lifting the two plastic clips.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
4. Remove the bulb socket from the lamp housing
by turning the bulb socket one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
5. Pull the old bulb from the lamp housing keeping the
bulb straight as you pull it out.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Reinstall the electrical connector by pushing in the
two plastic clips.
8. Push the bulb socket into the lamp housing and
turn the socket one-quarter turn clockwise.
1. Push tab to remove the license plate lamp.
2. Turn the license plate lamp assembly down to
remove it.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the socket counterclockwise and remove it.
4. Pull the bulb straight out to remove it.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
5. Push the new bulb straight into the socket.
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
page 6-10.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp assembly.
It is a good idea to clean or replace the wiper blade
assembly on a regular basis or when worn. For proper
windshield wiper blade length and type, see
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Fog Lamp (Up Level Only)
License Plate Lamp
Bulb Number
H11LL
To replace the wiper blade assembly:
W5WLL
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off.
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Turn on the windshield wipers and turn them
off again when the wipers are in the out-wipe
position. The driver side blade will be straight up
and down on the windshield.
3. Pull the windshield wiper assembly away from the
windshield.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Lift up the wiper blade assembly cap.
5. Pull the wiper blade assembly down far enough to
release it from the J-hooked end of the wiper arm.
Slide the assembly away from the arm.
7. Reinstall the wiper blade assembly by sliding it over
the wiper arm to engage the J-hooked end. Pull up
on the assembly to lock it into place.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch the windshield
when no wiper blade is installed could damage the
windshield. Any damage that occurs would not be
covered by your warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade arm to touch the windshield.
8. Repeat the steps for the other wiper.
6. Replace the blade with a new one.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your tires are
page 5-72.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
{ CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
flexing. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading the
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low-Profile Performance Tires
Winter Tires
If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18, P235/50R18,
255/40ZR19 or 285/35ZR19 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile tires. These tires are
designed for very responsive driving on wet or dry
pavement. You may also notice more road noise
with low-profile performance tires and that they
tend to wear faster.
If you expect to drive on snow or ice covered roads
often, you may want to get winter tires for your vehicle.
All season tires provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not offer the traction you
would like or the same level of performance as winter
tires on snow or ice covered roads.
Winter tires, in general, are designed for increased
traction on snow and ice covered roads. With winter tires,
there may be decreased dry road traction, increased road
noise, and shorter tread life. After switching to winter
tires, be alert for changes in vehicle handling and braking.
Notice: If the vehicle has low-profile tires,
they are more susceptible to damage from road
hazards or curb impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage can
occur when coming into contact with road
hazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb. The vehicle
warranty does not cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressure
and, when possible avoid contact with curbs,
potholes, and other road hazards.
See your dealer/retailer for details regarding winter tire
availability and proper tire selection. Also, see Buying
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
Summer Performance Tires
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,
and speed rating as the original equipment tires.
Many General Motors high performance models
come factory-equipped with tires that are optimized
for maximum dry and wet road performance while
still retaining satisfactory tread life, excellent
durability, and low noise levels. In severe winter
climates where snowfall may be significant, these
tires may be found to provide less traction.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The
letters and numbers following DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides
of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire, see Compact
page 5-89.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 5-72.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The speed
rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified to
carry a load.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be
made from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-72.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for
that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-21.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using government
testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity
weight and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading the
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label lists your
vehicle’s original equipment tires and shows the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your
vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
• Reduced fuel economy
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the tire and loading information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. The compact spare should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has 235/50ZR18, 255/40ZR19 or
285/35ZR19 size tires, they will require inflation
pressure adjustment when driving your vehicle at speeds
of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher. Set the cold inflation
pressure to the maximum inflation pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, or 44 psi (300 kPa), whichever is lower. See
the example following. When you end this high-speed
driving, return the tires to the cold tire inflation pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. See
High-Speed Operation
{ CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires. Sustained
high-speed driving causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire failure. You could have
a crash and you or others could be killed. Some
high-speed rated tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed operation. When speed
limits and road conditions are such that a vehicle
can be driven at high speeds, make sure the tires
are rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire inflation
pressure for the vehicle load.
Example:
You will find the maximum load and inflation pressure
molded on the tire’s sidewall, in small letters, near
the rim flange. It will read something like this: Maximum
load 690 kg (1521 lbs) 300 kPa (44 psi) Max. Press.
For this example, you would set the inflation pressure for
high-speed driving at 44 psi (300 kPa).
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s
tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is
not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as so
on as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
additional information.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science Canada
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when
a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding
the spare tire and wheel assembly, if the vehicle has
one. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the
vehicle’s tires and transmits the tire pressure readings to
a receiver located in the vehicle.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Using the Driver Information Center (DIC), the driver
can also check tire pressure levels using the DIC. For
additional information and details about the DIC operation
page 3-57.
Vehicles with TPMS operate on a radio frequency and
comply with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument
panel cluster.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A DIC warning message to check the pressure in a
specific tire is also shown on the DIC display screen.
The low tire pressure warning light and the DIC warning
message come at each ignition cycle until the tires are
inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved tire
sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
The Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for the
page 4-21, for an example of the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location on your vehicle.
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits use a GM approved
liquid tire sealant. Using non-approved tire sealants
could damage the TPMS sensors. See Tire Sealant and
the inflator kit materials and instructions.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your dealer/
retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the
problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can
cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come
on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire, if the vehicle has one. The spare tire does
not have a TPMS sensor. The DIC message should
go off once you re-install the road tire containing the
TPMS sensor.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal a
low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for service if
the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message comes on
and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was not
done or not completed successfully after rotating
the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message should go off
after successfully completing the sensor matching
process. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice
to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and Tire
Learning Active message displays on the DIC
screen.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any
time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors or
rotate your vehicle’s tires, the identification codes need to
be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors
are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire,
passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a
TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve stem. Activate
the TPMS sensor by increasing or decreasing the
tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds, or until a horn
chirp sounds. The horn chirp, which can take up to
30 seconds to sound, confirms that the TPMS sensor
identification code has been matched to this tire
position.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/
wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air
pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on the
tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall, to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than
five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions,
the matching process stops and you need to start over.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp, for the
driver side rear tire, the horn sounds two more
times to signal the tire learning mode is no longer
active. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the tire and loading information
label.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Inspect tires regularly for signs of wear or damage.
Also inspect the spare tire, if the vehicle has one.
For more information on tire inspection, see When It
Tire rotation is not recommended if the vehicle
has 255/40R19 size tires on the front wheels and
285/35R19 size tires on the rear wheels.
Different tire sizes should not be rotated front to
rear. Each tire and wheel should only be used
in its original front or rear position.
Tire rotation is recommended if the vehicle has
the same size tires on all four wheel positions.
These tires should be rotated every 5,000
to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km). See
Use the rotation pattern shown here when rotating
tires of the same size installed on all four wheel
positions.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-21.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC Spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires,
GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the
same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle will
continue to have tires that are designed to give the same
performance and vehicle safety, during normal use, as
the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
Spec number will be followed by an MS for mud and
additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your
vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this
aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure about
the need to replace your tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose snow tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle),
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you could
have a crash. Using tires of different sizes (other
than those originally installed on your vehicle),
brands or types, may also cause damage to your
vehicle. Be sure to use the correct size, brand,
and type tires on all four wheels.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that do
not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on it. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning that is
higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire Pressure
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading the
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride
and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes, traction control, and
electronic stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
{ CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance and
safety if tires not recommended for those wheels
are selected. You may increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems developed for your
vehicle, and have them properly installed by a GM
certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law. It should be noted that
the temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It
could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
CTS-V models should only use adhesive wheel weights
to balance the tires and wheels.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel
nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and
even come off. This could lead to a crash. Be sure
to use the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause a crash. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get all the rust or dirt off.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the threads of
the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel nuts might
come loose and the wheel could fall off, causing
a crash.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how
far it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension, or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash. Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the vehicle, drive slowly,
re-adjust or remove the device if it is contacting
the vehicle, and do not spin the wheels. If you do
find traction devices that will fit, install them on the
rear tires.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
page 5-63. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to
leak out slowly. But, if you should ever have a blow out,
here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer
to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop
well out of the traffic lane.
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
This vehicle may come with a jack and spare tire or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To use the jack and
To use the tire sealant and compressor kit, see
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
2. Park your vehicle. If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake firmly and put
the shift lever in P (Park). If your vehicle has a
manual transmission, move the shift lever to
R (Reverse) and set the parking brake firmly.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Storing the tire sealant and compressor kit or
other equipment in the passenger compartment of
the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike someone.
Store the tire sealant and compressor kit in its
original location.
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit,
there may not be a spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not be a place to
store a tire.
The tire sealant and compressor can be used to
1
temporarily seal punctures up to ⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the
tread area of the tire. It can also be used to inflate
an under inflated tire.
{ CAUTION:
Over-inflating a tire could cause the tire to rupture
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire to its recommended
pressure. Do not exceed the recommended
pressure.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
damaged sidewalls, or has a large puncture, the tire is too
severely damaged for the tire sealant and compressor kit
Read and follow all of the tire sealant and compressor
kit instructions.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This vehicle may have one of the following tire sealant
and compressor kits. The kit includes:
A. Selector Switch
(Sealant/Air or
E. Tire Sealant Canister
Sealant/Air Hose
(Clear)
Air Only)
B. On/Off Button
C. Pressure Gage
D. Pressure Deflation
Button (If equipped)
F. Air Only Hose
(Black)
G. Power Plug
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
label adhered to the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.
There is only enough sealant to seal one tire. After
usage, the sealant canister and sealant/air hose
assembly must be replaced. See “Removal and
Installation of the Sealant Canister” following.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (F) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
When using the tire sealant and compressor kit during
cold temperatures, warm the kit in a heated environment
for 5 minutes. This will help to inflate the tire faster.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-89. Do not remove any objects that have
penetrated the tire.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
8. Turn the selector switch (A) counterclockwise to the
Sealant + Air position.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (F) and the power
plug (H).
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit on.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after approximately 25 minutes, the vehicle
should not be driven farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot inflate the tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and unscrew the inflating
page 7-8.
The compressor will inject sealant and air into
the tire.
The pressure gage (C) will initially show a
high pressure while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop
and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak air until
the vehicle is driven and the sealant is distributed in
the tire, therefore, Steps 12 through 18 must be done
immediately after Step 11.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
The pressure gage (C) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on.
Turn the compressor off to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may be turned on/off until
the correct pressure is reached.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Turn the sealant/air hose (F) counterclockwise to
remove it from the tire valve stem.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Replace the tire valve stem cap.
19. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure.
Refer to Steps 1 through 11 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant to
Inflate a Tire (Not Punctured).”
15. Replace the sealant/air hose (F), and the power
plug (H) back in their original location.
16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
If the tire pressure has fallen more than 10 psi
(68 kPa) below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant cannot seal the tire.
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister (E) and
place it in a highly
visible location.
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, inflate the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
20. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire, and
vehicle.
The label is a reminder not to exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the damaged tire is repaired
or replaced.
21. Dispose of the used sealant canister (E) and sealant/
air hose (F) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in
accordance with local state codes and practices.
22. Replace it with a new canister available from your
dealer/retailer.
17. Return the equipment to its original storage location
in the vehicle.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer within a 100 miles (161 km) of driving
to have the tire repaired or replaced.
18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant in the tire.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit without Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
Always do a safety check first. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-89.
1. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from its
storage location. See Tire Sealant and Compressor
2. Unwrap the air only hose (G) and the power plug (H).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is positioned close to
the ground so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the tire valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Attach the air only hose (G) onto the tire valve stem
by turning it clockwise until it is tight.
The pressure gage (C) may read higher than the
actual tire pressure while the compressor is on. Turn
the compressor off to get an accurate reading. The
compressor may be turned on/off until the correct
pressure is reached.
6. Plug the power plug (H) into the accessory power
outlet in the vehicle. Unplug all items from other
accessory power outlets. See Accessory Power
If you inflate the tire higher than the recommended
pressure you can adjust the excess pressure by
pressing the pressure deflation button (D), if
equipped, until the proper pressure reading is
reached. This option is only functional when using
the air only hose (G).
If the vehicle has an accessory power outlet, do not
use the cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette lighter, use the
cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug cord in the door or
window.
11. Press the on/off button (B) to turn the tire sealant
and compressor kit off.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle must be running while
using the air compressor.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as it could be warm after usage.
8. Turn the selector switch (A) clockwise to the Air
Only position.
12. Unplug the power plug (H) from the accessory
power outlet in the vehicle.
9. Press the on/off (B) button to turn the compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the tire with air only.
13. Disconnect the air only hose (G) from the tire valve
stem, by turning it counterclockwise, and replace
the tire valve stem cap.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gage (C). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. Replace the air only hose (G) and the power
plug (H) and cord back in its original location.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
15. Place the equipment in the original storage location
in the vehicle.
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Unwrap the sealant hose.
2. Press the canister release button.
3. Pull up and remove the canister.
4. Replace with a new canister which is available from
your dealer/retailer.
5. Push the new canister into place.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Storage
The tire sealant and compressor kit is located in the
trunk.
The tire sealant and compressor kit has an accessory
adapter located in a compartment on the bottom of
its housing that may be used to inflate air mattresses,
balls, etc.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit without
Pressure Deflation Button
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit with
Pressure Deflation Button
A. Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
B. Foam Container
C. Wing Nut
2. Remove the retainer that holds the tire sealant and
compressor kit in place.
3. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit from
the foam container.
2. Locate the tire sealant and compressor kit (A) in the
center of the cargo area.
To store the tire sealant and compressor kit, reverse the
steps.
3. Remove the wing nut (C) that holds the tire sealant
and compressor kit (A) in place.
4. Remove the tire sealant and compressor kit (A)
from the foam container (B).
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
{ CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not move,
you should put blocks at the front and rear of the
tire farthest away from the one being changed.
That would be the tire, on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To gain access to the spare tire and jacking equipment,
do the following:
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
1. Remove the spare tire cover.
2. Remove the stow rod cap by pulling it straight up
off of the rod.
3. Turn the wing nut (A) on the compact spare tire (B)
counterclockwise to remove it.
4. Remove the spare tire and place it next to the
flat tire.
5. The tools you will be using next include the jack (C),
wheel wrench (D), and extension (E).
A. Wing Nut
B. Spare Tire
C. Jack
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Extension
F. Strap
The equipment you will need is in the trunk.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
3. Find the jacking location using the diagram above
and corresponding V-shaped locating notches
located in the plastic molding.
2. Loosen the wheel nuts, but do not remove them yet,
using the wheel wrench. Turn the handle about
180 degrees, then return the handle back to the
starting position. This avoids taking the wrench off
the lug nut for each turn.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
4. Insert the hooked end of the extension handle
through the jack and the flat end through the
wheel wrench.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into
the proper location before raising the vehicle.
Notice: If you position the jack under the rocker
molding and attempt to raise the vehicle, you could
break the molding and/or cause other damage to
your vehicle. Always position the jack so that when
the jack head is raised, it will fit firmly in the
notch located inboard from the rocker molding.
6. Raise the jack by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise until the slots in the jack head fit into
the metal flange located behind the V–shaped
locating notches on the plastic molding as shown.
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the jack lift head until the jack fits under the
vehicle.
7. Put the compact spare tire near you.
8. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground for the compact spare tire to fit under the
vehicle.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove all the wheel
nuts and the flat tire.
{ CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
10. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after
time. The wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust
or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire
brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off.
11. Install the spare tire.
12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel.
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Tighten each wheel nut by turning it clockwise with
your hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
15. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
14. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{ CAUTION:
Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly
tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with
a torque wrench to the proper torque specification
after replacing. Follow the torque specification
supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities
equipment wheel nut torque specifications.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
page 5-133 for the wheel nut torque specification.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Route the hook end of
the strap through the
wheel.
Storing the Flat Tire with a Flat Load
Floor
1. Put back all tools as they were stored in the rear
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
2. Put the flat tire in the tire storage bag, if there
is one.
3. Place the tire, lying flat, in the rear storage
compartment.
4. Route the loop end of
the strap (C) through
one of the cargo
8. Attach the hook to the cargo tie-down in the rear of
the vehicle.
tie-downs (A) located in
the rear of the vehicle.
9. Slide the buckle to tighten the cargo tie-down strap.
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the
compact spare tire in the trunk.
5. Route the hook (B) through the loop (C).
6. Pull the strap to tighten it around the cargo
tie-down (A).
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compact Spare Tire and Tools
Compact Spare Tire
Use the following diagram as a guide for storing the
compact spare tire and tools in the trunk:
{ CAUTION:
Driving with more than one compact spare tire at a
time could result in loss of braking and handling.
This could lead to a crash and you or others could
be injured. Use only one compact spare tire at
a time.
If your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare tire it
was fully inflated when the vehicle was new, it can
lose air after a time. Check the inflation pressure
regularly. It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop as
soon as possible and make sure the spare tire is correctly
inflated. The compact spare is made to perform well at
speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to
3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and
have the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the spare
with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tire will
last longer and be in good shape in case it is needed
again.
A. Wing Nut
B. Compact Spare Tire D. Wheel Wrench
or Flat Tire (valve
stem down)
Reverse the instructions for removing the spare tire and
tools to store the compact spare tire.
C. Jack
E. Extension
F. Strap
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do not
take the vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails. The compact spare can get caught on the
rails which can damage the tire, wheel and other
parts of the vehicle.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the compact spare.
Using them can damage the vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer
color to the vehicle’s interior.
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass
and/or cause damage to the rear window defogger.
When cleaning the glass on the vehicle, use only a
soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use
only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil,
always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leather
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a soft
cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used.
Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather. Never use spot lifters
or spot removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect leather may permanently change the appearance
and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove
dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean
soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be
used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of the interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
the instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wood Panels
Weatherstrips
Use a clean cloth moistened in warm, soapy water (use
mild dish washing soap). Dry the wood immediately
with a clean cloth.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Speaker Covers
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently, so that the
speaker will not be damaged. Clean spots with just
water and mild soap.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Care of Safety Belts
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ CAUTION:
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint
finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-113.
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or paper
towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a mild
detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish, steam or
caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed
to high polish, is recommended for all bright metal parts.
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
painted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on them
because they could damage the surface. Do not use
chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium,
calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and
water after exposure.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes,
could damage the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Never drive a vehicle equipped with
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Use only
approved cleaners on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of the
frame should be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system can
do this.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations, and
small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
the vehicle’s engine code.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
This label is on the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if
parts need to be ordered. The label has the following
information:
This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a
plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
5-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Electrical System
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker. If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow, the wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle
unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and
the damage would not be covered by the vehicle’s
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and
closes, protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing
5-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Underhood Fuse Block (CTS)
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical size
and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of the vehicle that you
can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Lift the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
5-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini-Fuses
A/C CLTCH
ABS
Usage
Air Conditioning Clutch
Antilock Braking System (ABS)
Adaptive Forward Lighting System
Mini-Fuses
AIRBAG IGN Airbag Switch
Usage
AWD
BCM 1
All-Wheel Drive
Body Control Module 1
AFS
5-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini-Fuses
BCM 2
BCM 3
BCM 4
BCM 5
Usage
Body Control Module 2
Body Control Module 3
Body Control Module 4
Body Control Module 5
Spare
Mini-Fuses
Usage
HORN
LO BEAM
DRL LEFT
Horn
Low-Beam Daytime Running
Lamps (Left)
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp
DRL/LT LO
BEAM
SPARE
Daytime Running Lamps/Left
Low-Beam Headlamp
Cigarette Lighter
Ignition
Navigation Motor
Odd Coils
BCM 6, BCM 7 Body Control Module 6 and 7
DISPLY
DRL RT
Display
LTR
Right Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps/Windshield
Washer Pump
Engine Control Module (ECM)
ECM, Transmission Control
MISC IGN
NAV MTR
ODD COILS
PED PRO
DRL/WSW
ECM
Not Used
ECM/TCM IGN Module (TCM), Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC), PASS-Key III+ Module
PassKey Module, Body Control
Module
PWR MODING
EMIS 1
EMIS 2
EVEN COILS Even Coils
Emission 1
Emission 2
RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam Headlamp
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp
FRT FOG
Front Fog Lamps
SPARE
SPARE
Spare
Spare
HDM WASH Headlamp Driver Module Washer
5-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini-Fuses
STR/WHL/
ILLUM
Usage
J-Case Fuses
STRTR
SPARE
WSW/HTR
Usage
Starter
Spare
Steering Wheel Illumination
Transmission Control Module
Battery
Windshield Washer Heater
TCM BATT
MAN SPD
SNSR
WPR
ENG PUMP
Manual Speed Sensor
Relays
A/C CMPRSR
CLTCH
Usage
Windshield Wiper
Engine Pump
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Daytime Running Lamps
DRL (W/O HID) (without High Intensity Discharge),
LO BEAM (HID) Low-Beam Headlamps (High
Intensity Discharge)
J-Case Fuses
ABS MTR
BLWR
BRK VAC
PUMP
Usage
ABS Motor
Blower
ENG PUMP
FAN S/P
FAN 1
Engine Pump
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 1
Brake Vacuum Pump
FAN 1
FAN 2
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
FAN 2
HI BEAM
HORN
Cooling Fan 2
High-Beam Headlamp
Horn
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
SPARE
EPB
SPARE
Spare
Electric Park Brake
Spare
IGN 1
LO BEAM
Ignition 1
Low-Beam (without High Intensity
(W/O HID) LT Discharge), Left Daytime Running
DRL (HID)
Lamp (High Intensity Discharge)
5-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block (CTS-V)
Relays
PWR/TRN
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
Usage
Powertrain
The underhood fuse block is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment.
SPARE
STRTR
WPR
Spare
Starter
Windshield Wiper
WPR HI
Windshield Wiper High Speed
WSW PUMP Windshield Washer Pump
FOG LAMP
Fog Lamps
Right Daytime Running Lamp
(High Intensity Discharge)
RT DRL (HID)
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
HEAD LAMP
WASH
Lift the fuse block cover to access the fuses.
Headlamp Washer
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
5-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini-Fuses
A/C CLTCH
ABS
Usage
Air Conditioning Clutch
Antilock Braking System (ABS)
Adaptive Forward Lighting System
Mini-Fuses
AIRBAG IGN Airbag Switch
S/ROOF
BCM 1
Usage
Sunroof
Body Control Module 1
AFS
5-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini-Fuses
BCM 2
BCM 3
BCM 4
BCM 5
Usage
Body Control Module 2
Body Control Module 3
Body Control Module 4
Body Control Module 5
Spare
Mini-Fuses
LTR
MISC IGN
NAV MTR
ODD COILS
PED PRO
Usage
Cigarette Lighter
Ignition
Navigation Motor
Odd Coils
Not Used
SPARE
BCM 6, BCM 7 Body Control Module 6 and 7
PassKey Module, Body Control
Module
RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam Headlamp
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp
PWR MODING
DISPLY
DRL RT
Display
Right Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps/Windshield
Washer Pump
Engine Control Module (ECM)
ECM, Transmission Control
DRL/WSW
ECM
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
STR/WHL/
ILLUM
Spare
Spare
Spare
ECM/TCM IGN Module (TCM), Instrument Panel
Cluster (IPC), PASS-Key III+ Module
Steering Wheel Illumination
EMIS 1
EMIS 2
Emission 1
Emission 2
Transmission Control Module
Battery
TCM BATT
EVEN COILS Even Coils
SPARE
WPR
INCLR
Spare
Windshield Wiper
Intercooler Pump
FRT FOG
Front Fog Lamps
HDM WASH Headlamp Driver Module Washer
HORN
Horn
DRL LT
Left Daytime Running Lamps
J-Case Fuses
ABS MTR
BLWR
Usage
ABS Motor
Blower
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp
SPARE Spare
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp
SPARE
Spare
5-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
FAN 1
Usage
Relays
LT DRL
PWR/TRN
Usage
Left Daytime Running Lamps
Powertrain
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
FAN 2
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
SPARE
EPB
MRTD
STRTR
SPARE
WSW/HTR
Spare
SPARE
STRTR
WPR
Spare
Starter
Electric Park Brake
MR Ride/Suspension Control
Starter
Windshield Wiper
Windshield Wiper High Speed
Daytime Running Lamps/Windshield
Washer Pump
Fog Lamps
Right Daytime Running Lamp
WPR HI
Spare
DRL/WSW
Windshield Washer Heater
FOG LAMP
RT DRL
Relays
Usage
A/C CMPRSR
CLTCH
LO BEAM
INCL
FAN S/P
FAN 1
FAN 2
HI BEAM
HORN
IGN 1
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Circuit
Usage
Breakers
Low Beam
HEAD LAMP
WASH
Intercooler Pump
Cooling Fan Series/Parallel
Cooling Fan 1
Cooling Fan 2
High-Beam Headlamp
Horn
Headlamp Washer
Rear Compartment Fuse Block (CTS)
The rear compartment fuse block is located on top of
the battery, on the right side of the trunk. The battery
access door must be removed to access the fuse block.
Ignition 1
5-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
Left Position Lamp
Not Used
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
LT/POS/LP
REAR/FOG
LCK
Lock
5-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Mini-Fuses
Usage
RT/POS/LP
Right Position Lamp
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
FUEL/DR/
RELSE
LT/POS/LP
MSM
Left Position Lamp
Not Used
Stoplamp
Memory Seat Module
OnStar® System
Passenger Door Module
Audio System
STOP/LP
ONSTAR
PDM
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release
UNLCK
Unlock
RDO
RDO/SPKR
REAR/FOG
Audio Speakers
Not Used
Mini-Fuses
AIRBAG
AMP
Usage
Airbag System
Amplifier
RKE/
PASS-KEY/
MDL
Remote Keyless Entry System,
Pass-Key Theft Deterrent Feature
Module
AUX/OUTLET Auxiliary Power Outlet
CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent
RT/POS/LP
RT/POS/LP
RVC/SNSR
Right Position Lamp
DR/LCK
ECM
Door Lock
Right Position Lamp
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
5-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mini-Fuses
S/ROOF
SPARE
Usage
Circuit
Usage
Breakers
Sunroof
Spare
PWR/WNDW Power Window
RT FRT/
Right Front Power Seat
SPARE
Spare
PWR/SEAT
STOP/LP
Stoplamp
LT/REAR/
WNDW
Left Rear Window
Theft Deterrent System, Universal
Home Remote System
THEFT/UGDO
REAR/WNDW Right Rear Window
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block (CTS-V)
Circuit
Breakers
Usage
The rear compartment fuse block is located on top of
the battery, on the right side of the trunk. The battery
access door must be removed to access the fuse block.
LF FRT/
Left Front Power Seat
Power Steering Column
PWR/SEAT
PWR CLMN
5-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
REAR/FOG
RT/POS/LP
Not Used
Right Position Lamp
LCK
Lock
Left Position Lamp
LT/POS/LP
5-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
FUEL/
DR/RELSE
STOP/LP
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release
Usage
Usage
Mini-Fuses
RT/POS/LP
RT/POS/LP
RVC/SNSR
FSCM
SPARE
SPARE
STOP/LP
Usage
Right Position Lamp
Right Position Lamp
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
Fuel System Control Module
Spare
Spare
Stoplamp
Theft Deterrent System, Universal
Home Remote System
Not Used
Stoplamp
UNLCK
Unlock
Mini-Fuses
AIRBAG
AMP
Airbag System
Amplifier
THEFT/UGDO
TRUNK/RELSE Trunk Release
AUX/OUTLET Auxiliary Power Outlet
CNSTR/VENT Canister Vent
DR/LCK
ECM
FUEL/PUMP Fuel Pump
LT/POS/LP
MSM
ONSTAR
PDM
RDO
RDO/SPKR
REAR/FOG
Door Lock
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Circuit
Usage
Breakers
LF FRT/
PWR/SEAT
PWR CLMN
PWR/WNDW Power Window
RT FRT/
PWR/SEAT
LT/REAR/
WNDW
REAR/WNDW Right Rear Window
Left Front Power Seat
Power Steering Column
Left Position Lamp
Memory Seat Module
OnStar® System
Passenger Door Module
Audio System
Audio Speakers
Not Used
Right Front Power Seat
Left Rear Window
RKE/
PASS-KEY/
MDL
Remote Keyless Entry System,
Pass-Key Theft Deterrent Feature
Module
5-132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
3.6L V6 Engine (VIN Code 7)
3.6L V6 Engine (VIN Code V)
6.2L V8 Engine — Cooling System
6.2L V8 Engine — Intercooler Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
10.3 qt
10.6 qt
13.4 qt
3.2 qt
9.7 L
10.0 L
12.7 L
3.0 L
3.6L V6 Engine
6.0 qt
6.0 qt
5.7 L
5.7 L
68.1 L
1.0 L
6.2L V8 Engine
Fuel Tank
18.0 gal
1.1 qt
Transfer Case — AWD
5-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Transmission Fluid
6-Speed Automatic CTS
6-Speed Automatic CTS-V
6-Speed Manual CTS
6-Speed Manual CTS-V
Wheel Nut Torque
6.7 qt
6.7 qt
6.3 L
6.3 L
1.9 qt
1.8 L
4.0 qt
3.8 L
140 lb ft
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
3.6L V6 Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
Manual
7
0.043 in (1.1 mm)
Automatic
Manual
3.6L V6 Engine
6.2L V8 Engine
V
P
0.043 in (1.1 mm)
0.040 in (1.0 mm)
Automatic
Manual
5-134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep this vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or
the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from the vehicle. To help protect the environment, and to
keep the vehicle in good condition, be sure to maintain
the vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer
for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a
few times a week. Or you might drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might
use the vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might
drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you
have any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have
a qualified technician do the work. See Doing
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need
more frequent checks and replacements. So please
read the following and note how you drive. If you have
any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good
condition, see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer
do these jobs.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-6.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
To maintain the ride, handling, and performance of this
vehicle, it is important that the first tire rotation service
be performed when the vehicle has 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). Check tires for inflation pressures
To purchase service information, see Service
should be checked, when to check it, and what
can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in
good condition.
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
page 6-16. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives
the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts
from your dealer/retailer.
displays in the Driver Information Center (DIC), service
is required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as
soon as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if driving under the best conditions,
the engine oil life system may not indicate that vehicle
service is necessary for over a year. However, the engine
oil and filter must be changed at least once a year and at
this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer
has trained service technicians who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
the last service. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 5-21 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
❑ Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear.
page 6-11.
❑ Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
❑ Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid
When the Change Engine Oil Soon message appears,
the following services, checks, and inspections are
required:
levels and add fluid as needed.
❑ Perform any needed additional services.
See “Additional Required Services” in this section.
❑ Inspect suspension and steering components.
See footnote (b).
❑ Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
❑ Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
❑ Visually check for any leaks or damage.
See footnote (k).
❑ Inspect restraint system components.
❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace
See footnote (l).
See footnote (e).
❑ Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
page 5-25. See footnote (n).
•
•
•
Replace passenger compartment air
filter. See footnote (g).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
CTS-V Only: Change 6-speed manual
transmission fluid (severe service only).
See footnote (o).
•
•
•
•
•
•
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change
transfer case fluid (severe service).
See footnotes (q) and (r).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
All-wheel-drive vehicles: Change
transfer case fluid (normal service).
See footnote (q).
•
CTS-V Only: Change hydraulic clutch
fluid. See footnote (o).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CTS-V Only: Change rear axle fluid
(severe service only). See footnote (o).
CTS-V Only: Change brake fluid
(severe service only). See footnote (o).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or
every five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
6.2L Supercharged V8 Engine:
Intercooler system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
See footnote (p).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
CTS-V Only: Inspect supercharger drive
belt. See footnote (m).
•
If using DOT-4 brake fluid,
change brake fluid at a regular
maintenance service every two years.
See footnote (j).
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc
brake pads for wear and rotors for surface condition.
Inspect other brake parts, including calipers, parking
brake, etc.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades,
if contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
damaged. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
page 5-115 for more information.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses
for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety
belts replaced. Also see Checking the Restraint Systems
on page 1-71.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate all body
door hinges. Lubricate all hinges and latches, including
those for the hood, rear compartment, console door, and
any folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may
be required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
(j) If using DOT-4 brake fluid only: Drain, flush, and
refill brake hydraulic system at a regular maintenance
service every two years. This service can be complex;
you should have your dealer/retailer perform this service.
(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(g) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
(l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(n) If the vehicle has the 3.6L V6 (Code V) engine,
replace the engine air cleaner filter every 40,000 miles
(64 000 km).
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
(o) Drain, flush, and refill clutch hydraulic system
at a regular maintenance service every two years.
This service can be complex; you should have your
dealer/retailer perform this service. Change fluid every
25,000 miles (40 000 km) if the vehicle is used for high
performance operation.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as high performance operation.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure
test the cooling system and pressure cap.
(p) Drain, flush, and refill intercooler system.
This service can be complex; you should have your
dealer/retailer perform this service. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-31.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(q) During any maintenance, if a power washer is used
to clean mud and dirt from the underbody, care should
be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output
seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and
contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the transfer case and should be
replaced.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
(r) Change transfer case fluid if the vehicle is mainly
driven under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as high performance operation or taxi,
Coolant Level Check
police, or delivery service.
Check the engine coolant level and, on CTS-V models,
check the intercooler coolant level. Add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-31.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety,
dependability, and emission control performance. Your
dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Inspect the vehicle’s tires for wear and make
sure they are inflated to the correct pressures.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. For automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only
in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in
any other position, contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
For manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in Neutral, push the clutch pedal down halfway, and
try to start the engine. The vehicle should start only
when the clutch pedal is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch pedal is
not pushed all the way down, contact your dealer/
retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• For automatic transmission vehicles, the ignition
should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift
lever is in P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
• With the key access ignition system, the ignition
key should come out only in LOCK/OFF. See
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
on page 2-44.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the parking
brake only.
{ CAUTION:
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to P (Park).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should
the vehicle begin to move.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-31.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit,
check the sealant expiration date printed on the
instruction label of the kit at least once a year.
See your dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.
Engine Coolant
Intercooler
System
(6.2L V8
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Supercharged Coolant.
Engine)
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377967,
in Canada 89021320).
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Hydraulic Brake
System
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid. Use only
GM Part No. U.S. 88958860,
Clutch System in Canada 88901244,
Super DOT-4 brake fluid.
The engine requires a special engine
oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M.
Oils meeting this standard can be
identified as synthetic, and should
also be identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.
However, not all synthetic API oils
with the starburst symbol will meet
this GM standard. Look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. For the proper viscosity,
Hydraulic
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Parking Brake
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides
Engine Oil
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
GM Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Manual
SAE 75W-90 GL5 Gear Oil
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Transmission (GM Part No. U.S. 88862475,
Axle Lubricant
(CTS)
Manual
in Canada 88862476).
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
With a complete drain and
refill add 4 ounces (118 ml) of
Limited-Slip Axle Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052358, in
Canada 992694) where required.
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
Transmission (GM Part No. U.S. 88861800,
(CTS-V)
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case Transfer Case Fluid
(All-Wheel
Drive)
in Canada 88861801).
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
(GM Part No. U.S. 88861950,
in Canada 88861951).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch,
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Key Lock
Cylinders
Pivots, Spring meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Category LB or GC-LB.
Floor Shift
Linkage
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood and Door
Hinges
Weatherstrip Lubricant
Rear Axle
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Part
GM Part Numbers
ACDelco Part Numbers
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
3.6L V6 Engine
15875795
25898499
A3096C
A3105C
6.2L V8 Engine
Engine Oil Filter
3.6L V6 Engine
25177917
89017524
19130403
PF2129
PF48
6.2L V8 Engine
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
CF133
3.6L V6 Engine
12597464
12571165
41-990
41-104
6.2L V8 Engine
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 22 in (56.5 cm)
Passenger Side – 21 in (53.3 cm)
15890056
15890057
—
—
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and
the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Date
Serviced By
Maintenance Stamp
Services Performed
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
United States, call the Cadillac Customer Assistance
Center, 24 hours a day, at 1-800-458-8006. In Canada,
call the Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication
Centre at 1-888-446-2000.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Cadillac. Normally, any concerns with the
sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments.
Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all
concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern
has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following
steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Cadillac, remember that your concern
will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That is why we
suggest following Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the following
address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within 40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in your case, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to
the Mediation/Arbitration Program at the following
address:
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns
have been addressed after the following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two. General Motors of
Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation
in a no-charge mediation/Arbitration program. General
Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding
arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related
vehicle service claims. The program provides for the
review of the facts involved by an impartial third party
arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before
the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire
dispute settlement process, from the time you file your
complaint to the final decision, should be completed in
approximately 70 days. We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and free of charge.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1–163–005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/cadillac
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information,
and more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Cadillac dealers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Cadillac — www.cadillac.com
Cadillac Merchandise — www.cadillaccollection.com
Help Center — www.cadillac.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
• Contact Us
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
www.Cadillac.com
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-458-8006
1-800-833-2622
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Cadillac has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Cadillac by dialing: 1-800-833-CMCC (2622).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada — Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance Offices
General Motors of Canada Limited
Canadian Cadillac Customer Communication Centre,
CA1-163-005
Cadillac encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Cadillac, the letter should be
addressed to:
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
United States — Customer Assistance
www.gmcanada.com
1-888-446-2000
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
1-800-263-3830
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-882-1112
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Coverage
Roadside Service
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
In the United States or Canada, call 1-800-882-1112.
Text Telephone (TTY), U.S. only, call 1-888-889-2438.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered.
In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not covered.
Calling for Assistance
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Cadillac and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Cadillac and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or payment to an owner or
driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of
the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
Cadillac Owner Privileges™
start a dead battery.
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either with
the most direct route or the most scenic route.
Additional travel information is also available.
Allow three weeks for delivery.
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 year/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Cadillac dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and
cannot be driven. Assistance is also given when
the vehicle is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated.
It is your responsibility for the repair or replacement
of the tire if it is not covered by the warranty.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cadillac Technician Roadside
Service (U.S. only)
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted.
Propane and other fuels are not provided through
this service.
Cadillac’s exceptional Roadside Service is more than
an auto club or towing service. It provides every Cadillac
owner in the United States with the advantage of
contacting a Cadillac advisor and, where available,
a Cadillac trained dealer technician who can provide
on-site service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Limit of six requests per year.
A dealer technician will travel to your location within a
30 mile radius of a participating Cadillac dealership.
If beyond this radius, we will arrange to have your
car towed to the nearest Cadillac dealership. Each
technician travels with a specially equipped service
vehicle complete with the necessary Cadillac parts
and tools required to handle most roadside repairs.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and
a copy of the repair orders are required. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor for
repairs not covered by the warranty are the owner
responsibility.
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while
you wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Courtesy Transportation
Participating dealers can provide shuttle service to get
you to your destination with minimal interruption of your
daily schedule. This includes one-way or round trip
shuttle service to a destination up to 10 miles (16 km)
from the dealership.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and hybrid
specific warranties in both the U.S. and Canada.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
you sign and complete a rental agreement and meet
state, local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include minimum age
requirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
You are responsible for fuel usage charges and may
also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,
excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle
service, the expense must be supported by original
receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount
allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for
U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported
by original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement
of fuel or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Additional Program Information
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
If you obtain a rental vehicle on your own, please see
your dealer for the maximum number of days allowed
and the allowance per rental day. Rental reimbursement
must be supported by original receipts. This requires that
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
an acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety performance, however,
the history of these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and
any related failures are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine
GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that
your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the
vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If a Crash Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to
your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that
you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage
is not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in danger or you are
instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will
help guard against post-crash legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged
at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
more information.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of
the report for a nominal fee. In some states/provinces
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer/retailer
or a private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable
with their work for a long time.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through the
information they will need. If they ask for a police
report, phone or go to the police department
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair.
If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take
your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement collision parts be
original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts
will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov;
or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin
contains instructions to assist in the diagnosis
and service of your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Cadillac Customer Assistance Center
Cadillac Motor Car Division
P.O. Box 33169
Detroit, MI 48232-5169
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
In Canada, call 1-888-446-2000, or write:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
Canadian Cadillac Customer
Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
General Motors of Canada Limited
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example, your
vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and control
engine and transmission performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and deploy airbags
in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle. These modules
may store data to help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules may also store data
about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate of fuel
consumption or average speed. These modules may also
retain the owner’s personal preferences, such as radio
pre-sets, seat positions, and temperature settings.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment
is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR
is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or,
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
if the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;
in response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that GM collects or receives may also be used for
GM research needs or may be made available to others
for research purposes, where a need is shown and the
data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions for information on data collection
in this manual for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other GM
system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine (cont.)
E
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light .............................................. 3-47
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LATCH System for Child Restraints ................... 1-43
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-14
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power (cont.)
P
Paint, Damage .............................................. 5-117
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-14
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|